4512-984-26381

1INTRODUCTION, TOOLS, ROOM CHECK

UNPACK, TRANSPORT, MOUNT

INSTALLATION

SETTING--TO--WORK

PERFORMANCE CHECKS

HANDOVER PREPARATION

OPTIONS

CABLING & EARTHING DIAGRAMS

RECORD OF MEASURED DATA

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11Manual Order No. 4512 984 263814512 983 06211 0.1

BuckyDiagnost TS

SYSTEM MANUALINSTALLATION

PHILIPSPHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS

DMC HamburgReproduction in whole or part of this manual is prohibited withoutthe written consent of the copyright owner. Use of the informationcontained herein, in any form and/or by any means whatsoeveris strictly reserved for Philips and its licensees. Use of thismanual by unauthorised persons is strictly prohibited.

Printed in HamburgFederal Republic of Germany

(04.0) 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TS

4512 983 06211 (04.0) 0.2 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06211

List of pages and modules (LOPAM)

4512 980 54001 Binder

Transparent plastic sheet

4512 983 06211 (TITLE) 0.1 (04.0)

4512 983 06211 (LOPAM) 0.2 (04.0)

4512 983 06211 (LOPAM) 0.3 (04.0)

4512 983 06211 (LOPAM) 0.4 (04.0)

SYSTEM MANUAL INSTALLATION

Section 1: Introduction, Tools, Quick room check

4512 983 06231 Tools 1-1 (02.0)4512 983 06241 Room Preparation 1-1 (02.0)

Section 2: Unpack, Transport, Mount

4512 983 06251 Unpack, Transport, Mount 2-1 (02.0)Packing list

Section 3: Installation

4512 983 06261 Sequence of installation 3-1 (04.0)4512 983 06271 Mounting the rails 3-1 (04.0)

4512 982 0014. Mechanical dimensions, wall stand left Z--1.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Mechanical dimensions, wall stand right Z--1.2 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connecting surface / floor fixing Z--5.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connecting surface / floor fixing, fixed table version Z--5.2 (02.0)

4512 983 06281 Installation of the bucky table 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06291 OP 30 SP -- Control desk 3-1 (03.0)

4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Contol desk stand alone, Floor plate Z--3 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Template for control desk, wall mounted version Z--4 (02.0)

4512 983 06301 OP 30 SP -- Mechanical Installation 3-1 (03.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Power mains adapt. 800VA, Mechanical dimens.Z--1.3 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Power mains adaptation 800VA, Location plan Z--1.4 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Basement, Fixation for earth quake protection Z--2.1 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Dimension wall support Z--2.2 (02.0)

4512 983 06311 OP 30 SP -- Cable connections 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06321 OP 30 SP -- Stator Connection at Generator Side 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06331 OP 30 SP -- H.T. - Unit 3-1 (03.0)

4512 983 06221 OP 30 SP -- Mains circuit Z1--1 (01.0)4512 982 0014. Earthing diagram Z--7.2 (02.0)

4512 983 05971 OP -- Installation wall junction box 3-1 (02.0)4512 982 0099. OP -- Connection of generator Z--6.1 (01.0)4512 982 0099. OP -- Connection of generator with Power Distribution Unit Z--6.2 (01.0)

4512 983 05991 OP -- Installation control desk 3-1 (03.0)4512 982 0099. OP -- Oparating panel, Mechanical dimensions Z--1.3 (01.0)4512 983 05521 OP -- Operating panel C Z1--11.1 (02.0)4512 983 05511 OP -- Backpanel EZ, Basis rack -2 Z Z2--5.2 (b/02.0)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06211

Section 3: Installation (continued)

4512 983 05981 OP -- Preparatory work 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06081 OP RAD -- Electrical connection 3-1 (02.1)

4512 983 05751 Block diagram Expansions Z1--1.2 (97.0)4512 983 05761 Power supply Z1--2.1 (97.0)4512 983 05951 Power supply for digital DIAGNOST Z1--2.1.1(02.0)4512 983 05941 Power supply with mains transformer Z1--2.2 (97.1)4512 983 05961 Power supply with mains transformer for digital DIAGNOST Z1--2.2.1(02.0)4512 983 05531 Basic interface Z1--6 (02.0)4512 983 05541 Tube extension overview Z1--14.1 (b/98.0)4512 983 05551 WG / 1WG / 2WG, Tube extension Z1--14.2 (c/97.1)4512 983 05571 WA/1WA/2WA adapter 4 auxil. units Z1--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05511 Backpanel EZ, Basis rack-2 Z Z2--5.2 (b/02.0)

4512 983 06091 OP RAD -- Hardware programming 3-1 (02.0)

Section 4: Setting-to-work

4512 983 06341 Setting to work 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06351 Adjustment procedure for tomo 4-1 (02.0)

4512 983 06141 Power supply, tomo version Z1--2.1 (99.0)4512 983 06361 Installation of tomo bar parking frame 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06371 Final installation work 4-1 (04.0)

4512 983 06151 Labeling 2Z--10 (03.0)4512 983 04441 bD TH2 -- Collimator Compliance Test 9-1 (03.0)

4512 983 06381 OP 30 SP -- Switch On the System 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06391 OP 30 SP -- Tube Adjustment 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06401 OP 30 SP -- Final installation work 4-1 (04.0)

4512 983 06201 OP 30 SP -- Labeling 2Z--10 (04.0)4512 983 06001 OP -- Switch-ON 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06101 OP RAD -- Software XRGSCOPE 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06111 OP RAD -- Configuration part 1 4-1 (02.0)

4512 983 05751 Block diagram expansions Z1--1.2 (97.0)4512 983 05571 WA/1WA/2WA adapter 4 auxil. units Z1--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05591 RGDV programming 2Z--2.0 (01.0)4512 983 05611 RGDV programming: example 2 2Z--2.2 (a/01.0)4512 983 05631 RGDV programming: example 4 2Z--2.4 (a/01.0)4512 983 05641 RGDV programming: example 5 2Z--2.5 (a/01.0)4512 983 05651 RGDV programming: example 6 2Z--2.6 (01.0)4512 983 05671 RGDV programming: example 8 2Z--2.8 (01.0)4512 983 05681 RGDV programming: example 9 2Z--2.9 (01.0)4512 983 05691 RGDV programming: example 10 2Z--2.10 (01.0)

4512 983 06121 OP RAD -- Configuration part 2 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 05571 WA/1WA/2WA adapter 4 auxil. units Z1--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05741 WA/WB/WP Cabinet wiring: Decade adapter 4 auxil. units Z2--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05591 RGDV programming 2Z--2.0 (01.0)4512 983 05611 RGDV programming: example 2 2Z--2.2 (a/01.0)4512 983 05631 RGDV programming: example 4 2Z--2.4 (a/01.0)4512 983 05641 RGDV programming: example 5 2Z--2.5 (a/01.0)4512 983 05651 RGDV programming: example 6 2Z--2.6 (01.0)4512 983 05671 RGDV programming: example 8 2Z--2.8 (01.0)4512 983 05681 RGDV programming: example 9 2Z--2.9 (01.0)4512 983 05691 RGDV programming: example 10 2Z--2.10 (01.0)4512 983 05721 List of characters 2Z--3 (97.0)4512 983 05771 Data sets of chambers 2Z--4 (97.0)4512 983 05731 Programming of device interfaces 2Z--5 (97.0)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06211

Section 4: Setting-to-work (continued)

4512 983 06011 OP -- Labeling 4-1 (04.1)4512 983 02831 Labeling 2Z--10 (a/04.0)4512 983 05701 Labeling (R/F) 2Z--10 (a/02.0)4512 983 05831 Labeling (RAD) 2Z--10 (a/02.0)

4512 983 06021 OP -- Final installation work 4-1 (02.0)

Section 5: Performance checks

Section 6: Handover preparation

Section 7: Options

Section 8: Cabling & earthing diagrams

4512 982 0014. Connection diagram, standard version, OPTIMUS L 50 Z--6.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connection diagram, tomo version, OPTIMUS L 50 Z--6.2 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connection diagram, standard version, OP 30 single phase Z--6.3 (02.1)4512 982 0014. Earthing diagram, OPTIMUS L 50 Z--7.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Earthing diagram, OPTIMUS 30 single phase Z--7.2 (02.0)4512 983 06851 Legend for cabling diagram Z--50 (03.0)

Section 9: Record of measured data

CE CertificatesTest protocol factory

Section 10:

Section 11:

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

bucky DIAGNOST TS Introduction, Tools, Room Check

(02.0) 1--1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06231

LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:

1-1...1-2 (02.0)

Tools

Contents

1. Tools 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1. Tools required 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06231

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips


(02.0)1--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06231

1. Tools

1.1. Tools required

Code no. Tool Generator

3 ∼ 1 ∼

4512 130 23901 Standard set of tools

4512 130 23921 Upgrade kit version 1 to version 2 of ceiling suspension liftingdevice

4512 130 23931 Distance tool for ceiling suspension rails

Ladder

Ruler 3 m

1312 503 60902 Grease, 25 gramms, type ISOFLEX, TOPAS NB 52 *

Loctite blue

Spirit Level

4535 986 15201 Dual laser alignment tool

4512 983 01041 Templates bucky DIAGNOST VE / VT

4512 983 02921 Template for bucky DIAGNOST TS

Spring balance 50 N

Mirror (about 30 x 40 cm)

Dose-meter (e.g. Dali or PMX III)

Oscilloscope, Tektroniks 486, or equivalent

Digital Multimeter

Non-invasive kVp meter

Digital mAs meter

Calculator

Mains resistance measuring instrument

ESD antistatic kit

2422 487 89772 Chip-ejector for service

25 mm aluminium for AMPLIMAT adjustment

PC with minimal MS Windows 3.1

Hardware key

8112 108 57929 Tomo phantom

Only for AEC purposes:

Sensitometer

Densitometer

25 or 20 mm AL test phantom

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips


4512--983--06241 (02.0) 1--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


1-1...1-4 (02.0)

Room Preparation

Contents

1. Dimension of Boxes 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1. bucky DIAGNOST TS 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. OPTIMUS 30 Single Phase (1 ~) 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. OPTIMUS 80 (3 ~) 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. bucky DIAGNOST wallstand 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Accessories 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. PMA 800 Box 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Check List 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Dimension of Cable Ducts 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06241

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Introduction, Tools, Room Check bucky DIAGNOST TS

(02.0)1--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06241

Room Preparation

1. Dimension of Boxes

1.1. bucky DIAGNOST TS

Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)

Net weight (kg)

265 89 190 750270 97 196 870

1.2. OPTIMUS 30 Single Phase (1 ∼)


Net weight (kg)

Generatorcabinet

445 360 550 56

Pedestral 44Packing 1090 610 710 120

1.3. OPTIMUS 80 (3 ∼)


Net weight (kg)

Cabinet 2120 720 860 220 180Generator 760 670 780 93 72

1.4. bucky DIAGNOST wallstand


Net weight (kg)

VE / VE2 2380 780 860 320 240

1.5. Accessories


Net weight (kg)

Accessories 920 620 780 60 47

1.6. PMA 800 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(only with OPTIMUS 30 single phase, is included in standard delivery)


Net weight (kg)

450 750 188 40500 800 300 60

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2. Check ListBefore the system is delivered, check the correctpreparations.

Pre check YES NOFree ways for delivery, check dimension of doors V V

Available tools to lift the ceiling suspension into the rails V V

Delivery note is in accordance with the questionnaire V V

Mechanical works YES NOCeiling rails are installed and aligned V V

Ceiling extension rails (optional order) are installed and aligned V V

Fixing holes for the bucky DIAGNOST TH / TH 2 V V

Fixing holes for the bucky DIAGNOST VE / VT, VE 2 / VT 2 V V

Electrical works YES NOMains installed V V

Cable ducts mounted V V

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Introduction, Tools, Room Check bucky DIAGNOST TS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06241

3. Dimension of Cable DuctsFor thedifferent cables of the systemdifferent duct sizesare required.

The exact dimensions depend on the location.For exact room conditions see PRB.

J

PHILIPS

MEX

² 20 cm2 (3 ∼)

from hospital mains

² 40 cm2

² 20 cm2

² 60 cm2

² 40 cm2 (1 ∼)

² 20 cm2

(3 ∼)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

bucky DIAGNOST TS Unpack, Transport, Mount

(02.0) 2--1E 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06251


2--1...2--6 (02.0)

Unpack, Transport, Mount

Contents

1. Transport data 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1. Box dimensions 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2. Roadway 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Unpacking 2--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1. Removal of column base from column 2--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06251

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Unpack, Transport, Mount bucky DIAGNOST TS

(02.0)2--2E 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06251

1. Transport data

1.1. Box dimensions

Weight

Gross 870 kg

Loading 816 kg

Net 750 kg

Dimension (L x W x H)

Box 270 cm x 97 cm x 196 cm

Pallet including loading 265 cm x 89 cm x 190 cm

Sub-pallet 140 cm x 89 cmSub-pallet 125 cm x 89 cm

1.2. Roadway

1 Roadway for the gross pallet

Crossing while moving min 170 cm width of the floor

2 Roadway for the sub--pallets

Crossing while moving min 115 cm width of the floor

min 170 cm width of roadwayfor gross pallet

min 115 cm

min 170 cm

870 kg

1

2

min 115 cm width of roadwayfor sub-pallet

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06251

2. Unpacking

The following steps should be done by four persons.

Dismantle the box, remove the foil.

1. Remove the rails from the pallet.

NOTEFor transportation in insufficient rooms only. See 2.1

”Removal of column base from column”.

The column is supplied with an inserted counterweight.For transport, the counterweight and the transversearmare secured by a screw.

DWARNING

Do not remove these screws before the installation of

the tube arm.

Loosen the transport screws and safety belts on thepallet.

2. Remove the box with documents and distancetool from the column.

3. Set up the column.

-- 3a Move the column approximatly 15 cm to footdirection of the column.

-- 3b Turn the column base about 90 °.The column must be ratched in the cam.

-- 3c Lift up the column and place it.

DWARNING

Lay corrugated paper or something similar onto the

floor in the area where the column is to be moved.

Apply extreme care when handling the connection

field.

Unscrew the colored screws from the wooden carrieron which the column was positioned and remove it.

12

Documents anddistance tool

3a

3b3c

90 °

3

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06251

4. Remove the box including cables from the table.

5. Remove the optional tomo devices from the pallet.

6. Remove the tube assembly from the pallet.

Remove the wooden items by removing the coloredscrews.

NOTEThe gross pallet can be splitted in two sub-pallets.

7. Remove the table from the pallet.

NOTEUse the shoulder straps. Do not lift the table by

means of the table top frame.

8. After unscrewing the sub-pallets from the palletyou get access to the table top. Remove the tabletop.

Dispose the package locally.

2.1. Removal of column base from column

This section is needed if the column is too large to enterthe X-ray room.

Tools required

Groofkey for column base PMS Code No. 4512 590 30362

Spring scale 200 N

Imbus Key 5 mm

Molykote DX PMS Code No. 4512 590 30321

Isotrophy alcohol

1. Dismantle base and column

1.1. Measure the breakaway force with a springscalewhen the column is in the the lock position.It shouldmeasure 110--150N. Place the hook ofthe spring scale on the screw head.

1.2. Repeat point 1.1, only column must be in freeposition. Should measure ≤ 60 N.

Cables

4

5

6

74

8

7

Table top deliveredin the pallet bottom

The pallet is deviable

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06251

1.3. Release the pressure on the Beta grid (measurethe distance “X” between nut and screwhead.Dimensions needed by the adjustment ofreassembling).

1.4. Remove the 2 Imbus (M5) screws and plate(see P 3).

1.5. Loosen the safety screws (pos. 1) on the groovenut (see P6).

1.6. Remove groove nut and steelring.

1.7. Carefully remove column base from column:

Remove the teflon ring.

Clean it and grease it with Molykote DX.

X

M5M5

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06251

1.8. Clean running surface and thread with Isopropylalcohol (see P4).For transport cover running surface and thread.

NoteThe stop pin pos. 3 can be removed in case of the

movement of the column is impaired. (This stop pin

will not be needed any longer.)

2. Assembling of column base and column

2.1. Grease the running surface of the column andcolumn with Molykote(PMS No. 4512 590 30321).

2.2. Insert the teflon ring.

2.3. Assemble the column base onto the column.(The column must be laid down whenassembling the column base. Take extremecare of thread.)

2.4. Assemble the steelring and groove nut.Hand-tighten the groove nut.

2.5. Rotate the column base for functional check.

2.6. Tighten groove nut until the inner steelring(spring) is compressed. Tighten safety screwspos. 1 (see P 6).

2.7. Adjust the beta grid (see P 2 and step 1.3).

2.8. Repeat step 1.1 and step 1.2.The breakaway force should measure 110--150Nm and the free running force should measure≤ 60 N.Adjust the force by loosening, resp. tighteningthe groove nut.

J

3

2

1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TSInstallation

3--1(04.0)E 2002 Philips Medizin Systeme

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06261

Mechanical Installation

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-4)

A B

1.0h 1.0h

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h

Installation of the bucky table

BuckyDiagn. TS -- (3-1..3-7)

2.5 h 2.5 h

A B

Sequence of installation

A BEngineerEngineer

Delivery at the customer’ssee at section 2

A B

2.5 h 2.5 h

Mounting the rails


Control desk

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-2)

Section 3

A B

1.0h 1.0h

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h

Cable connections

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-5)

A B

2.5 h 2.5 h

Stator Connection at GeneratorSide

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-3)

H.T. - Unit

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-5)

A B

2.5 h 2.5 h

next page

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06261

Hardware programming

OPTIMUS RAD -- (3-1..3-2)

Electrical connection

OPTIMUS RAD -- (3-1..3-12)

preceding page

Section 4

Installation of tomo bar parkingframe


A B

1.0h 1.0h

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h

Setting to work


2.5 h 2.5 h

A B

A BEngineerEngineer

A B

2.5 h 2.5 h

Adjustment procedure for tomo


A B

1.0h 1.0h

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h

Final installation work


A B

2.5 h 2.5 h

Switch On the System

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (4-1..4-2)

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h


OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (4-1..4-2)

A B

2.5 h 2.5 h

next page

Tube Adjustment

OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (4-1..4-2)

Preparatory work

OPTIMUS -- (3-1..3-3)

A B

1.0h 1.0h

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h

Installation wall junction box

OPTIMUS -- (3-1)

Installation control desk

OPTIMUS -- (3-1..3-7)

A B

1.0h 1.0h

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06261

Configuration part 2

OPTIMUS RAD -- (4-1..4-38)


OPTIMUS RAD -- (4-1..4-13)

preceding page

A B

1.0h 1.0h

A B

1.5 h 1.5 h

Labeling

OPTIMUS -- (4-1)

2.5 h 2.5 h

A B

A BEngineerEngineer

A B

2.5 h 2.5 h


OPTIMUS -- (4-1)

Software XRGSCOPE

OPTIMUS RAD -- (4-1..4-5)

A B

1.0h 1.0h

Switch-ON

OPTIMUS -- (4-1)

A B

1.0h 1.0h

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Installation BuckyDiagnost TS

(04.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06271


3-1...3-8 (04.0)

Z-1.1 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.Z-1.2 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.Z-5.1 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.Z-5.2 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.

Mounting the rails

Contents

1. Mounting the rails 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tomo option only 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coarse Adjustment Tomo option only 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1. Insertion of column to long rail 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Installation of tube arm 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Final alignment of the column (tomo only) 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06271

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TS Installation


4512-983-06271

1. Mounting the rails

DWARNING

Before starting, refer to your planning room layout!

(see PRB)

Assemble main rail.Depending on the installation of the bucky wallstand(right or left), place the extension rail right or lefthandside to the main rail (see Z-1.1, Z-1.2, Z-5.1 andZ-5.2).Insert the screw (suppliedwith system) with awasherand tighten with a spanner.

Tomo option only

Loosen the4 screws of the tomoswitch rail (1) and theend switch cams (2) and remove them.

Place the main rail parallel to the wall.Mark the 5 fixing points on the floor.Remove the rail.Drill the 8mmholes approximately 75mmdeep in themiddle of the marked area.Insert the 5 anchor dowels (suppliedwith system) intothe holes.Move the rail back to the installation position. Levelthe rail using a spirit level. Use the spacer ifnecessary.

Insert the screws (supplied with system) with thewashers and tighten with a spanner.

position of extensionrailfor bucky wallstand left

main rail

position of extensionrailfor bucky wallstand rightpencil

2

1

extension rail

min 314 mm

longitudinal axis tabletable position forbucky wallstand left

extension rail

min. 314 mm

longitudinal axis tabletable position forbucky wallstand right

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06271

Place the short rail parallel to the long rail.

Insert the tool (1 Rail distance tool) (supplied withsystem) to adjust the distance of the rails.Measure the distance of the rails using a rule.Mark the 2 fixing points on the floor.Remove the rail.Drill the 8mmholes approximately 75mmdeep in themiddle of the marked area.Insert the 2 anchor dowels (suppliedwith system) intothe holes.

Move the rail back to the installation position.Level the rail using a spirit level. Use the spacer ifnecessary.Insert the screw only with washer (supplied withsystem) to the opposite side where the column is tobe inserted.Tighten with a spanner.

Coarse Adjustment Tomo option only

Align front andback rails (2, 3) to same level using thespirit level. Use additional spacers if necessary.

DWARNING

For a good performance with the tomo option it is

essential to align front and back rail very precisely.

An alignment test will be made after installation of the

column.

Install the tomo switch rail (1).Insert both end switch cams (2).Insert screwswithwashers and tightenwithAllen key.

716 mm

1

shortlong

short

position forbucky wall stand left

extension rail

716 mm

1

shortlong

short

extension railposition forbucky wall stand right

2

3

2

1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06271

1.1. Insertion of column to long rail

Remove buffer (1) from long rail.Insert the column into the rail system (2).

DWARNING

Apply extreme care when handling the ball bearings

and be careful not to damage the microswitches and

optical sensor B1 positioned in area 3.

Install buffer (1) to the rail system.Check the leveling of the column in both directionsusing a spirit level.Use the spacers if necessary.Check whether the column moves easily andsmoothly.Insert the second screw with washers into the shortrail.Tighten with a spanner.Mount the longitudinal center switch UB S17 (pos.3)standard, or position control switch assembly fortomo.

1.2. Installation of tube arm

Remove transport screw (2) from the counterweighton the front of the column.

DWARNING

Loosen transport screw (1) only and move the

complete block downwards.

Pull down the transverse arm and secure thecounterweight in its maximum top position byinserting transport screw (2).

1

2

2 3

1

2

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06271

Route the cables from the top of the column to the leftand right of the column (1).Open top cover (2) of the transversal tube arm byremoving the 4 screws 1 (Allen key, 2,5 mm).

DWARNING

Do not remove the screws (2) on top of the cover.

These screws are fixing the brake rail!

Place the pallet with transverse arm, including tubehousing and collimator, next to the column.Lift up the arm and insert it into column (3).

Insert stop screw (1).Remove the transport screw. The tube arm must beeasily movable in Z-direction.Connect the plug UFX38 (2).

1

2

3

2

11

11

1

52

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06271

Fasten the cable (4) by using a tie-wrap.Connect UFX38 (3)Install the cover of transverse arm (3).Install the front cover of transverse arm (5)(see previous page).

Install the cable support into the top of the column.

Install the wall junction box.

34

5

6

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06271

Route the cables on the column as shown in thefigure 1.Replace top cover of the transversal tube arm.Connect X20 / X22 on stand control UB1 for standardversion.Connect X20 / X21 / 22 / 23 / 24 on stand control UB1for tomo version.

Figure 1

** All three items, wall box, column cable support andtube arm, should be located as shown in figure 2(design and function, especially cable lenghts).*1 Location for ceiling suspension junction box. Thisbox is not included in the system. Please, order thisitem locally as an option.(PMS Artikel No. 9848 500 26201 ceiling suspensionbox for CS, this item is not included andmust beorderedoptionally).

NOTEMax. room height with ceiling suspension box = 3.0 m

Figure 2

UB1

*1 = 0.6 meter

**Wall box

Column cableSupport Tube arm

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06271

1.3. Final alignment of the column(tomo only)

Move the column to the left end position.

Check the alignment of the rails by moving thecolumn smoothly to the other end. The columnmust remain steadily upright over the whole length.If necessary, adjust the level of the front rail withspacers as described in Section “Mounting therails”.

The alignment can be done either with the spirit level orwith the following method:

Final adjustment

Apply a vertical line to the wall on the right-hand side,e.g. with a colored adhesive tape.Check the vertical alignment whilemoving the columnalong the rail.

If corrections should be necessary:

Add adjustment plates (0) under back (1) or front rail(2), or, for vertical correction (5),adjust the ball bearing (3). Three different holes areavailable. For easy access move the column to theleft or right end position.

If the column is not vertical (6), the correction can bemade with an eccentric ball bearing (4).

J

(6)

(5)

(3)

(4)

(2)

(1)

(0)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

bucky DIAGNOST TS Installation


4512--983--06281


3-1...3-7 (02.0)

Installation of the bucky table

Contents

1. Installation of bucky table 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Installation of Tomo pivot tower (tomo only) 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Installation of bucky-device extension (tomo only) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Installation of position control switches (tomo only) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Change position of the AMPLIMAT chamber from left to right side 3-7. . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06281

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Installation bucky DIAGNOST TS


4512-983-06281

1. Installation of bucky table

NOTEFour (4) persons are necessary to lift the table.

The bucky table is supplied as a complete unit.

Remove thewooden blocks from the longitudinal sideof the pallet and place them at the rear of the pallet.

Remove the 4 transport screws and push themdown.

DWARNING

Do not lift the table by means of the tabletop frame

structure.

Insert the shoulder straps into the loops (1).

Lift up the table with the shoulder straps (1).

Remove the pallet and lower the table carefully.

Place the table with rear end towards the short rail.See room layout plan.

Insert screws (1) into the short rail and fit the tableto the rail.

Drill two 12 mm holes approximately 75mm deepfor screws (2).

Insert the 2 anchor dowels (supplied with system)into the holes.

Use the spacer if necessary.

Insert screws (2) supplied with system and washersand tighten with a spanner.

Level the table in both directions using a spirit level.

Use the spacer if necessary.

Insert screws (2) supplied with system andwashers and tighten with a spanner.

Install the foot-switch assembly.

1

1

2

1

table position forbucky wallstand right

2

1

table position forbucky wallstand left

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06281

Remove the red screws (2) of the transport securingdevice of the tabletop carrier on both sides.

Remove the tie-wraps form the Bucky device (1)

i

Figure 1

Remove the cassette tray from the bucky.

Move the tabletop to its maximum front position (ifit is already mounted).

Loosen 2 screws at the rear (1).

Tilt the tabletop unit gently as shown in figure 2.

Secure the tabletop by fixing the lever (2) via thescrew (3).

Remove the tie-wraps (4) from the arm braces onboth sides (elevation table only).

Figure 2

DWARNING

Always remove cassette tray before opening the

tabletop. Tilting the tabletop with inserted tray will

cause damages to both table and cassette tray.

DWARNING

Tilting the table top beyond the upright position can

cause damages to the cover of the table base.

1

2

2

1

2

3

4

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06281

2. Installation of Tomo pivot tower(tomo only)

Position tomo pivot tower towards the correspondingmounting holes at the rear side of the table.

Thread cable W12 (laser cable) through the centerholes of table base and pivot tower base.

Insert 4 screws together with washers and toothlock washer (supplied with system) from the tableinside and mount the tomo pivot tower.

Close the tabletop.

Secure tabletop with the 2 screws at the rear.

Reinstall the cassette tray.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06281

3. Installation of bucky-device extension(tomo only)

Mount the bucky-device extension and insert the4 screws with washers and tooth lock washers(supplied with system).

DWARNING

Do not support or level the free hanging end of the

bucky device extension while tightening the screws. It

will self-align to the film level in a slightly tilted position

when the screws are installed.

Tighten the screws.

4. Installation of position control switches(tomo only)

Pull corner iron with position control switches out of thecolumn base (they are parked in the column base fortransportation)

Insert screws with washers (supplied with system)into the column base and fit the position controlswitches as shown in (1).

Tighten screws with Allen key.

23

14

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06281

DWARNING

Move column with extreme care in order not to

damage or shear off the microswitches and the

magnetic sensor while passing the cams of the

tomo switch rail.

Adjust microswitches for center position andsafety end:

-- The microswitches (2) (center position) and (3)(safety limit switch) must trigger when passingtheir respective cams, as shown in the figurebelow.

Adjust the proper alignment of the magneticmeasuring sensor: Slowly move the columnalong the tomo switch rail:

-- the magnetic sensor B1 (1) (angle position)must not touch any of the cams. The distancebetweenmagnetic sensor (1) and cam should be 1 mm.

The functional test will be performed after power up (seeSection “Checking drive and position control switches”).The detection of any cam position regarding 40 ° / 20 °/ 8 ° is indicated with the red LED located as shown inthe figure.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06281

5. Change position of the AMPLIMATchamber from left to right side

If the position of the bucky DIAGNOST TS must bechanged from left 1 to right 2 side thenamanipulationof the connector at the amplimat chamber isnecessary.

1 Remove the table top by removing the fourscrews.

Mark the center line of the table top to the frame(both sides).

Remove the table top.

2 Dismantle the anti-scatter grid by unscrewingthe four metal holders.

Remove the anti-scatter grid.

3 Dismantle the amplimat chamber by looseningthe two grub screws.

The wire assignment on the connector PH X1must be changed crosswise, the violett wire onX1:1 with the black wire on X1:3.

4 Place the measuring chamber in the newposition.

Fix with the two grub screws.

5 Re-install the anti-scatter grid.

Fix it.

6 Re-install the table cover in new position.

Fix the cover.

J

1

2

Left handversion

Right handversion

1

54

3

Left handversion

Right handversion

6

2

1.5mm

PH X1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase


4512--983--06291


3-1...3-2 (03.0)

Z-3 (02.0) A4 4512 982 0091.Z-4 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0091.

Control desk

Contents

1. Control Desk 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Second handswitch (Option) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Control desk 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06291

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation


4512-983-06291

1. Control Desk

1.1. Second handswitch (Option)

Remove the eight screws (hexagon sockets) belowthe user interface.

Connect the handswitch to J15 on the ATP--console(J15/1 = Common, J15/2 = Prep., J15/3 = Exp.)and establish the connection to the secondhandswitch.

Adapter (1) is delivered in the accessory kit of thegenerator cabinet.

Close the console.

1.2. Control Desk

Three versions of control desks can be installed.

1 For fixing the stand alone use template Z--3.

2 The table versions can be positioned without anyfixings at the table. Only two fixing bolts at backside must be removed.

3 The desk support plate has to be removed fromthe column of the stand alone version.

Use template Z--4 to mount the correspondingsupport plate to the wall. Snap the control desk onthe support plate.

J

1

5

6

2

3 4

8 7

HOPTIMUS

1J15

AEC -- Console

2 3

ATP -- Console

Secondhandswitch

1

1

2

3 HOPTIMUS

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06301


3-1...3-4 (03.0)

Z-1.3 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0091.Z-1.4 (02.0) A4 4512 982 0091.Z-2.1 (02.0) A4 4512 982 0091.Z-2.2 (02.0) A4 4512 982 00911

Mechanical Installation

Contents

1. Mechanical Installation 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Installing the generator basement 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Installing the wall support for the generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Installing the generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Installation of PMA 800 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06301

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06301

1. Mechanical Installation

1.1. Installing the generator basement

NOTEUsually, the generator cabinet stands free.

In seismic areas or if required otherwise, secure thegenerator with four drillings to the floor, see drawing

Z-2.1.The generator can also be positioned at wall side. To

hang the generator, see drawing Z-2.2.

1.2. Installing the wall support for the generator

This support kit is an option and allows positioning thegenerator wall side.

The support kit code No. 4512 591 03171 isincluded with the standart delivery,see drawing Z--2.2.

1.3. Installing the generator

Remove the two screws which fix the generator oncover bottom.

CAUTIONDo not damage the capacitor!

Lift the generator by two persons off the shippingpallet and place it at its destination in the room.

CAUTIONThe generator has a weight of 66 kg!

∅6.2 mm,M6 x²100 mm

18x

HV--Tank

Area to lift up thegenerator

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06301

1.4. Installation of PMA 800

Concerning fixing and mechanical dimensions of thewall box refer to drawing Z--1.3.

Connect named cables to PMA 800

Main power-hospital to PMA 800N (L2) X22L1 X23PE X25

Main power PMA 800 to generator cabinetN (L2) X22L1 X23PE X25

The main power line is internally(generator cabinet) connected at factory side.

Power ON (for Bucky TS)gen. -- 7x11:4 to X7 (PMA 800) +24 Vgen. -- 7x11:t to X8 (PMA 800) +GND

Power supply (230 V∼) to bucky TS

Main power hospital to PMA 800 ---- X1 = L1

X2 N (L2)(see drawing Z--1.4)

∅10 mm,M8 60 mm

6x

PMA 800

Mainpowerin

Mainpowergernerator

Signalcables

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06301

NOTEThis main power supply is different to the supply

circuit coming in on X22/X23.The main power supply for bucky TS table must be

fused from hospital side ≤ 16 A.

X11 --

X12 --230 V ∼ if 230 V UI is present

output to the table bucky TS

X13 --

X14 --230 V ∼ in case UI = 120 V / 208 V / 240 V

output to the table bucky TS

Trafo T1 is programmed at factory side to UI = 240 V.

If other voltages are used on field side Re - programm T1.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06311


3-1...3-5 (02.0)

Cable connections

Contents

1. Cable connections 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Cable routing to generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Signal Cables 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1. Power On 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.2. Room Interface - “X-ray warning light” 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.3. Room Interface - “room in use” 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.4. Tube Thermo Switch 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06311

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06311

1. Cable connections

1.1. Cable routing to generator

Fix the external system cables securely at thecabinet.

- Internally route each cable along the back sidetowards the cable outlet positions and secure thecables at the cabinet by using cable ties.

- Check all connectors on the PCBs and inside thecabinet.

Check that all electrical connections are firm andsecured and that all cable clamps are in place andthat drag relief is provided.

Check that all the cables are correctly routed.

NOTEBefore mounting the covers of the cabinet, performconfiguration, calibration and acceptance tests.

1.2. Signal Cables

1.2.1. Power On

Connect

- ZX11:4 to X7 on PM 800- ZX11:7 to X8 on PM 800

3F9

3F73F63F23F8

3TS1

X11

X1X3

Screen

GND

+ 24 V UNR17

18relay

3TS1

Power On

4

7

ZX11X7

X8bucky TS

PM 800

115/230 VAC

X13

X14

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06311

1.2.2. Room Interface - “X-ray warning light”

NOTERoom warning light is released during “prep” and

“exposure”.

Interconnection with external control relay K1.

The relay K1 (radiation warning indicator) must beordered seperately.Code No. 4512 100 45231 (or supply locally).

Respect the polarity for diode (1N4007) in accordanceto 24 V / GND.

Interconnection of generator interface with internalcontrol relay and externally power supply.

Interconnection of generator interface with controlrelay and internally power supply ∼ (60 W = Pmax).

Select the power supply on 3TS1 according to thelamp voltage (230 V-3TS1:26; 115 V-3TS1:27).

Power rating for external warning light = max 70VA.

-- ROOM LIGHT

+ 24 V UNR17

24

1N4007relay

115/230 VAC

3TS1X--Ray Room

roomwarninglight

K1

ROOM LIGHT SW

ROOM LIGHT SUP 47

48

115/230 VAC

3TS1X--Ray Room

roomwarninglight

ROOM LIGHT SW

230 VAC*26

48

3TS1

X-Ray Room47

0VAC*10

ROOM LIGHT SUP

roomwarninglight

add jumper

27

230/115 VAC

115 VAC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06311

1.2.3. Room Interface - “room in use”

NOTERoom warning light is released with “generator

powered ON”. = Room in use.

For K1a = 120 VAC / K1b 240 VAC Relais

X1

PMA800

K1b

K1a120 V

240 V

X2

L1

L2 (N)

K1

T1X13

X14

U = 230 V

Room warning light

F1 6A

NOTEK1 (a/b) must be supplied locally.

For K1 c = + 24 V DC

X7

PMA800

K1c 120 V

240 V

X8

+24 V

GND

K1c

T1X13

X14

U = 230 V

Room warning light

K1 = Code No. 4512 100 45231 or supply locally

X13

(a/b)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06311

Interconnection of door switches.

If there are no door switches bridge 8 to 10 at 7X11. Ifthis bridge is missing, the generator shows “no ready”condition.

1.2.4. Tube Thermo Switch

An X-ray tube is provided by the thermostat or pressureswitch signal, cable(s) must be connected to theterminal block 4TS2 in the power cabinet:

THERMOSTATWIRES

TERMINAL 4TS2

THERMOSTAT SIGNAL 1 4TS2--4

THERMOSTATCOMMON (GND)

4TS2--5

If an X-ray tube is not provided by the thermostat signal,bridge both terminals in the terminal block 4TS2.

J

-- DOOR

DOOR RTN

22

23

door switches

3TS1X--Ray Room

8

10

7X11

black

white

1

2

3

4

5

6

4TS2

GND

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06321


3-1... 3-3 (02.0)

Stator Connection at Generator Side

Contents

1. Stator Connection at Generator Side 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Stator Connection at Tube Side 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06321

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06321

1. Stator Connection at Generator Side

For cable routing see sketch.

DWARNING

Use screened cables.

Connect the screen to earth at both ends.

Do not mix up with the phases; otherwise,

components of the rotor control may be destroyed.

Shorten the stator cable to the reuired length.

Keep enough length to open the module panel.

Connect

-- wire 1 to 4TS2 pin 2



-- screen to

3F9

3F73F63F23F8

3TS1

X11

X1X3

Screen

1

2

3

4

4TS2stator cable

3

1

2

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06321

1.1. Stator Connection at Tube Side

In case the tube is delivered with the system, theconnections are already done at factory.

At the tube end:

Place the jumpers across terminals 100 and 200accordingly.

Connect the stator cable.Use: wire 1 for phase U

wire 2 for phase Vwire 3 for phaseW

Earth the screen of the stator cable at the tubehousing with the metallic clamp.

J

U

V

W

101 202

109 210

RO 1750(PHILIPS)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06331


3-1...3-5 (03.0)

Z1-1 (01.0) A3 4512 983 06221Z-7.2 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.

H.T.-Unit

Contents

1. H.T.-Unit 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. H.V.-Generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. X-Ray Tube 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Main Connection 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1. Resistance Check 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2. Earthing of PMA 800 - Generator - bucky TS 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3. Main Connection 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4. Installation of Emergency Switch 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. Connection between control desk - generator cabinet side. 3-53.1. Programming 50 / 60 Hz on control desk 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2. VA audible and visible alarm 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3. Connection for AEC J1 / J2 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06331

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06331

1. H.T.-Unit

CAUTIONThe terminal pins of the high voltage cables are

extremely sensitive to damage. Take particular careof handling them. Ensure that they are straight and

the ends of the pins end up parallel.

1.1. H.V.-Generator

CAUTIONDo not tilt the H.V. generator when transporting it!

In case a tilting angle of 45_ has been exceeded, thesetting-to-work of the generator can be started notbefore a waiting time of about 8 hours has passed.Otherwise the H.V. generator may be destroyed byelectrical spark over!

Unpack generator cabinet.

Unpack the H.V. generator.In case oil is visible on the high tension tank,check oil level in the H.T.-tank,tolerance: 24 mm ± 2 mmOil: Shell Diala G in 2.5 l container4512 148 43172

Make sure that no foreign matter falls into the oil!Otherwise the transformer must be exchanged!

Remove the named “vent.” (ilation) screw.The screw should only be inserted while moving thegenerator.

Check oil level at the anode and cathode cables.

If there is not enough oil at the plug connections openthe oil plug at the HV transformer and remove withinjector some oil from the transformer side.Anode and cathode cables are furnished according tothe room layout (length of the cables).

24 mm at20 - 30 _C

deaerating hole

HV-Tank

Ventilationscrew

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06331

Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV-oil in theHV-transformer plug connections.Do not use a silicone washer.Do not grease the plugs with silicone.

Carefully connect the anode and cathode cable ofthe X-ray tube to the respective HV-transformerplug connection. Ensure that all connections aredone correctly, respect polarity.

Tighten the cable nuts securely.

1.2. X-Ray Tube

1 Grease only the top of the H.T. connector withthe delivered silicon grease.

2 Position the silicon washer to the H.T. connector.

Carefully connect the anode and cathode cable tothe respective X-ray tube plug connection. Ensurethat all connections are done correctly.Respect the polarity of the anode and the cathode.

Tighten the cable nuts securely.

2. Main Connection

2.1. Resistance Check

Check the mains resistance measured on PMA 800X22 to X23.

Umains = 208 V-- Umains = ___________V

-- RXG = _____________mΩ (± 64 mΩ)

Umains = 230 V-- Umains = ___________V

-- RXG = _____________mΩ (± 74 mΩ)

Umains = 240 V-- Umains = ___________V

-- RXG = _____________mΩ (± 84 mΩ)

NOTE6 mΩ will be added by 6 cm cable length

from PMA 800

10 mm

Silicon washer

12

fromhospital

PMA 800

Ω

X23X22

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06331

2.2. Earthing of PMA 800 - Generator - bucky TS

See “Earthing Diagram Z-7.2”.

Secure the power supply of the electrical roominstallation is OFF.

2.3. Main Connection

The generator is prepared at factory side with amain connection cable 3 x 35 mm2, 6m long.Connect the main cable wires at the PMA box asdelivered to the generator.

CAUTIONThe generator is factory set to 240 VAC line voltage

for single phase.

CAUTIONF4 is linked at factory.

N is present.In case L2 is present, insert F4.

2.4. Installation of Emergency Switch

If a emergency switch must be required locally use thespace (DIN rail) in the PMA 800.All cable routing and connections have to be done inregulations locally.

Secure the emergency switch has been connectedto the room electrical cabinet so that it cuts thepower to the generator when it is switched OFF.

For technical details refer to Z1-1.

mains fromhospital

PMA 800 3 x 35 mm2 , 6 m long

X22 X23

to generator

X25

MOD--6 (right side)TB

L1

N(L2)F4

F3

Spare for ex.Emergency switch off

DIN--Rail

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06331

3. Connection between control desk - generator cabinet side

Control desk generator cabinetGND - 8 GND - 12J1 6J2J2 3TS1 / 4TS2 connected at factory sideJ3 6J3A / 6J3BJ5 7A1 : J4

3.1. Programming 50 / 60 Hz on control desk

3.2. VA audible and visible alarm

When 80% tube load is reached. The system is indicating this limit with an audible and visible signal. Programmingfor this function via dip switch 3024 SW2-2 control desk to ON (closed) position.

3.3. Connection for AEC J1 / J2

Connect the J1 - Amplimat table andJ2 - Amplimat BWS to

AEC adaptation board 7A1 on generator cabinet side.J4 - Supply from control deskJ3/J5 - Not used

J

3024SW1

CONTROL CONSOLE

1

50 Hz60 Hz

3024SW21 VA - 80 % audible /

visible alarm4

ON

J5

J1 J2 J3 J4

7A1

AEC Adaptation

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

(1~208/230/240V)and bucky DIAGNOST

Mains circuitOPTIMUS 30 Single phaseA3

01-

04-1

0 Sc

hr.

4512 983 06221 C Philips Medical Systems

(01.0) Z1-1

BR4+-

F6

F7

F2T 1.5A

F8

BR2+-

+5V+12V

-12V

+24V-PSU

L1 T1

GND

+5V

+12V

-12V

C72,4 MF

K3

13

14

10 6

11 7

115 VAC SW

9 5

115 VAC

0 VAC

C62,4 MF

-PWR ON

+12V

-12V

+12V UNR

+12V UNR

GND

5

6P2

3

9

2

8

6

7GND

1

-PWR OFF4

-PWR ON

-PWR OFF

GND

T 3A

T 3A

T 3A

*

F9T 0.4A

LF3

1

2

3

4

BR1+-

220 VAC SW

+SUPPLY

-SUPPLY

TS1

17

220 VAC SW

115 VAC SW27

220 VAC SW

115 VAC SW

60 VAC RTR220 VAC RTR

12 8

1

4

2

3

7

10

8

9

6

jumper

jumper

+24VK3

( S3-E1 )

( S5-F4 )

POWER

0 VAC RTR ( S5-F3 )

( S3-C4 )

+24V

F4

F3

+24V

L1 T1

L2 T2L2 T2

R120 ohm, 100w

K6

A

B

-CHRG DR

L1

N

F13

10

J3

-LINE CONT-LINE CONT

T 10A

T 10A

T 50A

T 50A

DELAYED

LF1

+24V-PSU

K5

A

B

BUS +

BUS -

LAMP

26

15-12 V

16

+12 V

( S3-B4 )

( S3-D4 )

( S4-F2 )

( S4-F2 )

MA

INS

LO

AD

R333 ohm

C5470 nF

CR2

R433 ohm

C6470 nF

R533 ohm

C9470 nF

CR3

R633 ohm

C10470 nF

C71 nF

C111 nF

C8470 nF

AC3

+

-

AC2

24 VAC TR

0 VAC TR( S4-D1 )

115 VAC

21

9

7

8

6

5

4

1

20

18

15

12

11

208 VAC

240 VAC

230 VAC

0 VAC

220 VAC

19 VAC

10.4 VAC

0 VAC

140 VAC

0 VAC 17

2

35

13

28 VAC

0 VAC

Shield Stud

3

60 VAC

3012 VAC

20 VAC

24 VAC

T2POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER

PS1LVDC POWER SUPPLY

6NL1

INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD

16 VAC14 VAC

22 VAC

26 VAC

19

3132331634

Module 3

Module 2

F12

Module 5A5

F2

3.2A slowX16

X15

X12

X11

X6

X5 T1B0004145

240V

208V

120V

3TS1:18

3TS1:17X10X9

0.63A slow

F3 D1

D2K1

X7 =24V

X8 -GND

24VDC

+

-

X13

X14

output230V

L (230)

N (230)

Bucky TS

N

L

emergency offswitch

PE

L1

N (L2)

3 x 4mm -6m2

X32PE

X21

X22

X23X24

X25X26X27

X28X29X30X31

X17X18X19X20

N (L2)

L1

spare

PEL1

N(L2)

PEPE

U= 120V...240V

4...10Input

with ESU toOPTIMUS 30generator

Spare for X-ray roomlight andemergency off

PMA 800

X11/12 if 230V main is presentconnect direct without Trafo T1

Module 6

X4

X3

MainX2

X1

N (L2)

L1

6A

Motor protection switch

F1

7X11:4

7X11:7

X20

(supply it locally)

350V (

+

+-10%)DC

110 VAC

* Connected to: - 110V AC for stand alone option- according to mains without stand alon

220V/115Vexternalsupply forRoom RADindication

GND -12*

* In Case N is presentFuse F4 is linked.

F= 16A

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS Installation


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


3-1 (02.0)

Z--6.1 (01.0) A4 4512 982 0099.Z--6.2 (01.0) A4 4512 982 0099.

Installation wall junction box

1. Installing the wall junction boxMount the wall junction box at the place where the generator is intended to be installed.(See drawing “Connection of generator” and manual UNIT 4512 103 75380 for wall junction boxes).

If necessary, install the optional surge arrester WN inside the wall junction box.(See surge arrester documentation.)

If applicable, mount the filler panels of the generator to the wall junction box.

Have the mains cable present at the clinic connected to mains terminal MEX by a person who is authorized forthis job.

Check the phase sequence of L1, L2 and L3.

DWARNING

Switch OFF the mains supply present at the clinic and make sure that it cannot be switched ON again

accidentally.

J

4512--983--05971

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips


(03.0) 3--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991


3-1...3-7 (03.0)

Z--1.3 (01.0) A4 4512 982 0099.Z1--11.1 (02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05521Z2--5.2 (b/02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05511

Installation control desk

Contents

1. Installing the operating panel 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Desk version 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Stand version 3--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Wall mounted version 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Supporting angle version 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Additional release switch 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--05991

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Instalation OPTIMUS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991

1. Installing the operating panel

1.1. Desk version

See ”Operating panel” Z--1.3.

Accessories:

-- 2 feet for the unit

-- 2 elastic buffers, black

-- 5 insert strips for the RGDV buttons

-- sheet with RGDV symbols

-- release switch

Unpack the desk carefully.

Mount the release switch on the left-hand orright-hand side of the desk:

Mount the holding bracket to the edge of thedesk (1) with the twoM4x10 countersunk screws.

For visual reasons the release button should be inline with the +/-- buttons on the control desk. Usethe appropriate holes in the bracket.

Slide the release switch onto the bracket.Fasten it parallel to the desk edge with the twoM4x10 cheese-head screws, securing rings andwashers (2).

Screw in the 2 feet for the unit at the bottom of thedesk.

Glue the 2 black elastic buffers to the front edgesof the bottom of the desk such that they are actingas the front feet.

184H95

C300 X3

1 2

3

150H94

2x

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991

Define the assignment of the RGDV buttons 1 ...8. Glue the respective symbols to the insert stripswhich are provided with subsidiary lines (1).

Raise the keyboard about 3mm above the desk.Use an allen key (2).

Push the insert strips under the keyboard foil.Press the angulated, protruding end of each insertstrip into the housing of the desk (3).

Lower the keyboard to its initial position (4).

Remove the cable cover at the rear side of thedesk.

Connect the cables:

Supply cable EZX20 <------> C200X1EZX6 <------> earth

Data cable EZX46 <------> C300X1

Release switch <------> C300X3

Patient Data Organizer <------> C300X2 (option)

Check the function programming plug for X44 as shown in Z2--5.2 and put it into socket EZX44.

Provide drag relief for the supply and data cables with the clamp present on the desk.

Screw on the cable cover.Make sure that the cable drag relief device of the release switch (1 cable tie) remains under the cover.

151H96

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

3mm

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Instalation OPTIMUS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991

1.2. Stand version


Additional accessories:

-- 4 dowels S10

-- 4 hexagon cap screws 8 x 60mm

-- 4 washers

S Position the desk stand according to the respective room layout.

S Mark the fixing holes on the floor.

S Set the 4 dowels supplied into the floor (drill bit: 10mm).

S Screw on the desk stand with 4 screws and washers.

S Route the supply and data cables from the bottom to the top within the desk stand.Provide the cables with drag relief.Cable ends including plugs should protrude beyond the edge of the desk by about 500mm.

S Mount the release switch as described in chapter 1.1.

S Assign the RGDV buttons 1 ... 8 to the desired symbols as described in chapter 1.1.

S Connect the cables to the desk as described in previous chapter 1.1.

S Screw on the cable cover.Ensure the cable drag relief device of the release switch (1 cable tie) remains under the cover.

S Mount the operating panel on the stand.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991

1.3. Wall mounted version


Additional accessories:

-- 4 ball-head bolts

-- 4 dowels S8

-- 4 hexagon cap screws 5 x 30mm

-- 4 washers

-- 2 screws 4 x 10mm

-- 2 angle plates

-- 4 nuts

Screw on the angle plates into the wall frame.The short ends of the angles must be pointingupwards.

Screw the 4 ball-head bolts into the wall support.

Mark the 4 fixing holes of the wall frame at therespective place on the wall.

Set the dowels supplied into the wall(drill bit: 8mm).

Screw on the wall frame with the 4 hexagon capscrews and washers.

Provide drag relief for the supply and data cablesin the wall frame.Cable ends including plugs should protrudebeyond the edge of the desk by about 500mm.

Mount the release switch as described in chapter1.1.

Assign the symbols to the desired RGDVbuttons 1 ... 8 as described in chapter 1.1.

Connect the cables to the desk as described inprevious chapter 1.1.

Mount the operating panel on the wall frame andfix it with the left two screws.

Screw on the cable cover.Ensure the cable drag relief device of the releaseswitch (1 cable tie) remains under the cover.

The wall frame is designed symmetrically.In case connection cables come from above theframe can be mounted upside down.Only the ball-head bolts and the angle plates stillkeep their position.

189H96

Wall fastening (4x) Ball--head bolt (4x)

Desk fastening (2x)

Cable passage

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Instalation OPTIMUS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991

1.4. Supporting angle version

Screw the ball-head bolts (2) into thesupporting angles (1):

Left angle ------> on the left at the bottom

Right angle ------> on the right at the bottom

Press the ball-head bolts (2) into the respectivesnap bushing of the desk (4).

Fix the supporting angles (2) to the desk (4) withthe 2 screws M4 (3).

4

3

2

1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

096L99

32-- /HSPRRQ

31-- /HSEXRQ

30-- / UI-- / --24V HS

8 9

1 5

S1

S211 12

3 6

bl

blk

br1

2

3

1

2

3

bl

blk

br1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 EXP PREP

Hand switch 4512 103 7200x(9803 700 3000x)

Hand switch with adapter (9890 000 0249x)

Cable adapter4512 104 3823x

Operating panel CC300 X3

67

9



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05991

1.5. Additional release switch

An optional second release switch is supplied with alonger spiral cable: 9890 000 0249x

The scope of delivery includes various wall hooksand an adapter cable. Electrical connection is madein parallel with the existing release switch which ismounted on the desk itself.

To do this, plug the pins of the adapter cable intothe D-Sub connector of the existing releaseswitch.

Sequence:

Adapter:connector pin <------> D-Sub:

connector pin

1 <------> 6

2 <------> 9

3 <------> 7

Reference: Figure below and drawing Z1-11.1 “Operating panel C”.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

+40 ... +44V

eff2 x 2V

X2:15

X2:14

X2:13

X2:12

X2:11

NR PR X/

EZX46XRG bus

GND GEN

Operating panel C

c Philips Medical Systems

(02.0)

Power supplyC200A1

/A3

02-0

8-08

EZX6

16 bit

trapezoidal~ 10% / 20kHz ~20%

+4.95 ... +5.25V

Output specification

+14.25 ... +15.75V

CAN bus

blk

bl

GND 15V

1+15V

rd

4512 104 38231

9890 000 02491

Cable adapter

Hand switch with adapter

H40

H42

H1

H9

H33

H41 H45

NR PR X/

4

59

1)

20*H17

C100

X2:2X2:1

+5V

CPU

alphanumeric display

S39

D5

PO 15V

1)

B1

V20

H29 16*H30 16*

16*H3216* 16*

H25

Z1-11.1

EZX46XRG bus

RD MN ON/

as Patient Data Organizer

Schr

.

RD PR X

GND 15V

PO 15V

PO 5V

Release switchEXP

D5

X1:12

D1RS 232driver

RQ SN X/

H2

X1:06

X2:23

driver

X2:22

X2:21

X2:20

X2:19

driver

X3

3

LED matrix

PO 15V

8

72

6

+

+5V

K1

GND 12V

MN ON/

+5V

C300

X2:26

X2:49

X2:1X2:2X2:3X2:4

X2:5

X2:6X2:7X2:8X2:9

X2:10

Desk panel

X4:1

X2:50

X1:15

X1:7

X4:49

X1:14

X2:47

X4:50K1

EN X/

PO 12V

X1:11

D7/D8

CAN H

X1:2CAN L

X2:16

X1:13

X2:17

MAP decoder

X1:10

S30 S31

S15S12

S24

S3

S22 S23

S2

S19

S37

S32

S21

S13S11

S4

S20

S35 S36

S10 S14

S29S28S27S26S25

S18

S34

S17

S33

S7S5 S8

S16S9

S6S1

X2:18

D3

X4:23

X4:22

EPROMD2

X4:21

X4:20

X4:19

PREP

Hand switch

H7H6

1

H5

H16

H4

2

H3

H15

H2

H14

S24

H13H12H11H10

H37H36H35H34

H44H43

+20 ... +30V

D516bitmicro

controller

X2:47

X2:48

S38OFF

X2:22

X4:46trapezoidal~ 10% / 20kHz ~20%

X2:46+15V

X4:48

X4:11

X4:12

X4:13

X4:14

X4:15

X4:16

X4:17

X4:18

micro controller

Input specification

RESET/

GND 15V

X1:8

RD PR X

X1:1

2 x 4V

X1:2

eff

PO 26V

EZX20

X1:1 B2

X1:3

+

X2:25.

X4:25.

..

..X2:39X4:39

SENSE

X1:4X1:5

X14X2:4

X1:6

X2:5

X1:7

X15X2:6

X16X1:8

X2:7

X2:8

X2:10

X2:11X2:12

...X2:23

V21

V3

Ready

Start

X2

61

8

2

3

V21

7

PO 15V

rdH1

PO 15V

RTS

CTS

Error

TXD

RXD

V3

RD PR X

+15V

+42V

2V, 20kHz

X10X1:21

...

X11

X12

X1:17

...

X13

X2:17

X1:14

X1:22

X1:13

...

X2:21

X1:23

X1:12

X2:14

X1:26

X1:11

X2:13

X1:9X1:10X2:9

P0 15V

H3116*

16*H27

H2616*

H28

5

4

PC

X4:2X4:3X4:4

X4:5

CAN - announcment

Selftest

1)

X4:6

Remarks:

X4:7X4:8X4:9X4:10

Pull-up resistor andlinks C300X3:1 - 6 / 3 -7 / 5 - 9from CPU 4512 108 08244 onwards.

C300CPU

ON4V, 20kHz

4V, 20kHz

2V, 20kHz

X1:2

X18

X1:1X17

X1:3

X19X2:3

Power supplyforalphanumeric display

controller

16 bit

NR PR X/

micro controller

X1:5

X1:4

PO 15V

D4

RAM4512 103 72001

+5V

push button matrix

S1

br 1

S2

HSPRRQ blH39

HSEXRQ blk

H8

3

2

4512 983 05521

X1

X17X18X19

X14X15X16

X13 X10

X11

X12

soldering side

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

02-0

3-19

Basis rack-2 Z4512 108 0936.

Schr

./Kö

A1/A

3 Backpanel EZ

Philips Medical Systemsc

Z2-5.2(b/02.0)

V53

MN OFPO 0VV45 V46

PO 12V

RESET C/3

4

5

V47V49

3

412

513

614

715

8

Tube extension

5

6

2

41

3

24V74 V70 V71 V72 V73 V77

2

3

5

6

1 2

X3

PO 26V

X18

2

X1711

1

5

PO 26V 1

4

3

V5V4

PO 26V

V3

Operating panel

kV power unit EQ/E2Q

Tube supervision

2

1 4

1

2

X201

2

2

10

X191

9

V7

8

7

6

V6

X12H.V. generator

2513

V86 12

11

820

719

6

5

4

3

18

17

16

15

10

H.V. generator

X11

9

V19

10

V14

X ACT S/

CAN L

CAN H

X71CAN H

STOP X C/

RESET C/X73CTRL X C/X74

15

5

7

13

19 9

14

2

4

6

12 59

V32

I2 2

I2 3

I2 4

E PO CV2

CV2 GND

CV2 GND OLCV2 ID/

TP HT SG

TB CU FR PO

2

V36 V39

HT AN

12

13

14

3

15

4

5

X46

8

7

6

1

2

X14

3

135

124

3

AC 230V L2

1

AC 0V XG

AC 230V L12

X15

V65

14

12

V66

412

5

614

715

NG 15VPO 15V

MN ON

PO 5VCAN H PO 12V

7MN EM OF

8RD MN 0N MN EM OF

R32

switch on circuitEmergency OFF

815

714

6

1)15

14

13

12

8

7

6

11

5

4

103

91

V31 V33

CAN LCAN H

V40

Decade adapter WA/WB

V27 V23

Operating panel

EN X/

RQ SN X/NR PR X/

PO 15V

MN ON

AC 0V XG2

1X13

AC 0V XG

3

4

Operating panel,

X4X47

CAN PO 5V

Power supply

HT CA GNDHT AN GND

TP HT GND

TB CU FR NG

9

10

NG 15V

11

V24V34V28

PO 26V

16

2

AC 230V L1 AC 230V L1

11

210

19

CV2 65 ID/

X45

V35

CTRL X C/

V13 V15

X72

V17

EN X C/

X76

15

13

X52

CAN L

1

X ACT S/

62

RESET C/7

3

STOP X C/8

4

R2

CV2 EN/

V87

RX CAN 2

CAN HCAN L

V89 V91 V92 V93 V94

PO 15VPO 15V

RM DR CT

R1

PO V

V60 V57

X ACT/

CTRL X/

NR PR X/

V59

V55

RESET C/

V58

CAN L

4512 104 910224512 130 5444.

PO 5VCAN H

CAN L

RC ON/

8

7

6

5

2

1

13

2)

I1 4/

E NG CV1

CV1 TMCV1 OL

I2 1/

I2 2/

I2 3/

I2 4/E NG CV2

CV2 TM

CV2 SH

S CAN GND

I1 3/

I1 2/I1 1/

EN X/

PO 0V

RQ SN X/PW ON PO

SI PH/

PO 26V 1 PO 26V 1

kV power unit EQ

PO 26V

TB 2/

TB 2 RT/

TB 3/

TB 3 RT/

V21

21

22

HT CA

23

X351

PO 15V

I1 4

E PO CV1

CV1 ID/

CV1 GND OL

CV1 GNDCV1 EN/

CV1 65 ID/

V78

I2 1

kV power unit E2Q

V76 V75

I1 3

I1 2

I1 1

13

X34

12

14

11

18

17

14

16

15

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

25

1

2

2310

19

20

229

21V18 V22 V20

3

2

X81

11

10RESET C/

9RC RD/

1nF

130R

Termination resistor for X45

V11

V16

X77EN X C/

X75

for OPTIMUS C

To System CAN X432)

To Signal Bus X231)

1)

1)

2)

operating panel CwithFunction programming plug for X44

operating panel C

R/F

RX CAN 1

V62V67 V64

Rotor control 2

V63V61

RD MN ON

TH OL

CM TH

4512 104 9004.

X151

9 PW ON NG/

without

V48

RAD+CD

TH OL SW/

CM TH SW

X44

1

FI TF2 2FI TF1 2

FI TF2 1FI TF1 1

X6X51

2 2

X24

V88V90

MN ON

19

V69

2

11

10

24

S CAN PO

PO V

RESET SW/

4512 983 05511

34

125

136

147

158

11

210

19

Generator CAN termination plug

V12

V56

V54

R4

L2 L3

V10

V50 V51

For survey of the components see Z2-5.4

CAN move to WAX52 / WBX52

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05981


3-1 ... 3-3 (02.0)

Preparatory work

1. Preparatory work

1.1. Mounting of the H.V. generator in the cabinet

CAUTIONDo not tilt the H.V. generator while transporting it.

In case of a tilting angle larger than 45_, the setting-to-work of the generator can be started not before a

waiting time of about 8 hours has passed. Otherwise the H.V. generator may be destroyed by electrical

sparkover.

Unpack generator cabinet E.

In case the packingmaterial is strongly soiledwithoil check the oil level. Repair it if necessary.

Tolerance: 2mmOil: Shell Diala G in 2.5l container

4512 148 43172

Remove the deaerating screw completely from the cover of the H.V. generator. Only this way the precision ofthe high voltage measuring divider corresponds to the specification.In case of return shipment of theH.V. generator this screwmust be fixed again. Therefore, keep the screw layingon top of the cover.

CAUTIONMake sure that no foreign matter falls into the oil. Otherwise the transformer must be exchanged.

Take the two transport bars from the rear side of the cabinet.

Lift the H.V. generator into the generator cabinet with the transport bars.The 4 connecting bolts GX1001 to 1004 must point at the front of the generator cabinet.

4512--983--05981

142H94

24mm at 20 - 30_C

deaerating hole

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Installation OPTIMUS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05981

1.2. Electrical connection of the H.V. generator

Connect the H.V. generator electrically:

Generator ConnectionRemarkGenerator

version from <------> toRemark

E1 (GND) <------> GX1100 (GND) Ground

50/65/80kW ZX12 <------> G100X15 Route the cables along the front and left--ZX35 <------> G100X14

Route the cables along the front and lefthand edge of the H.V. generator. Fix them.

QC13:1 <------> GX1003

Twist the cables!

NoteThe sequence of the connecting bolts is notin numerical order.See drawing page 1--3

50kWQC03:1 <------> GX1002

See drawing page 1--3.

Push the screening cap forward over theconnecting bolts and tighten it. Attach theconverter cables including the screening tothe screening cap with cable ties.

GX1001 <------> GX1003The 50kW version might have direct linkson each side or a link on one side and achoke of 1 ... 6 loops on the other side forthe reason of kV symmetry

GX1004 <------> GX1002

the reason of kV symmetry.

NoteDo not change these links or chokes.

QC13:1 <------> GX1001Twist the cables!

Note

65/80kW

QC03:1 <------> GX1002

NoteThe sequence of the connecting bolts is notin numerical order.See drawing page 1--365/80kW

2QC13:1 <------> GX1003

See drawing page 1--3.

Push the screening cap forward over theconnecting bolts and tighten it Attach the

2QC03:1 <------> GX1004

connecting bolts and tighten it. Attach theconverter cables including the screening tothe screening cap with cable ties.

WGX61 <------> GK1:1

50/65/80kW WGX67 <------> GK1:2

2nd tube WGX62 <------> GK2:1

WGX68 <------> GK2:2

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--05981

Turn the two earthing angles of the H.V. generator outward and screw them on to the members of the cabinet.

J

199H96

converter cables (twisted)

terminal for the screenof the filament cable

screening capearthing angles

fixing signal cable

fixed at the screening cap

Connection of50kW version

X1001

QC13:1

QC 03:1

X1002

Connection of65/80kW version

X1001 X1003

QC03:1

QC13:1

X1004

2QC13:1

2QC03:1Twist the cable Twist the cables

Link or choke Link or choke

X1002X1003 X1004

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS RAD Installation


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081


3-1...3-12 (02.1)

Z1--1.2 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05751Z1--2.1 (97.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05761Z1--2.1.1 (02.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05951Z1--2.2 (97.1) A2/A3 4512 983 05941Z1--2.2.1 (02.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05961Z1--6 (02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05531Z1--14.1 (b/98.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05541Z1--14.2 (c/97.1) A1/A3 4512 983 05551Z1--15.1 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05571Z2--5.2 (b/02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05511

Electrical connection

Contents

1. Electrical connection 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Earthing 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Mains connection 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1. Mains connection of the generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Stator connection 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1. Shielding 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2. Connection 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Signal cables 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.1. Room decade cable 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2. Tube supervision 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.3. CAN interface 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.4. Adapter for 4 auxiliary units 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.5. Dose inputs 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.6. Patient Data Organizer PDO (option) 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. H.V. cables generator side 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. Emergency-OFF circuit 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06081

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Installation OPTIMUS RAD


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1. Electrical connection

1.1. Earthing

See ”Earthing diagram” in section 4.

1.2. Mains connection

1.2.1. Mains connection of the generator

DWARNING

Switch OFF the mains supply present at the clinic and make sure that it cannot be switched ON again

accidentally.

See ”Connection diagram” in section 4.

Measure the internal mains resistance at the terminal MEX with a suitable measuring instrument.

L1 - L2: Ri = ............... mΩ

L1 - L3: Ri = ............... mΩ

L2 - L3: Ri = ............... mΩ

Required max. mains resistance at generator input:

Mains voltageMains resistance

Mains voltage30kW 50kW 65/80kW

190V * -- 40mΩ --

220V * 130mΩ 60mΩ --

240V * 160mΩ 80mΩ --

380V 500mΩ 300mΩ 200mΩ

400V 500mΩ 300mΩ 200mΩ

440V 500mΩ 350mΩ 240mΩ

460V 500mΩ 350mΩ 240mΩ

480V 500mΩ 400mΩ 300mΩ

* with external mains transformer (max 50kW)

Maximum permissible internal mains resistance: 500mΩ

CAUTIONConnect phase wires in correct phase sequence.

Connect the mains cable of the generator to terminal MEX: L1 / L2 / L3 within the wall connection box.If the optional surge arrester WN is fitted, connect the cables at that point to terminal WNX1100.

Connect the examination unit supply (max. 5A) to terminal MEX: T1 / T2 / T3.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.3. Stator connection

1.3.1. Shielding

CAUTIONTo suppress interferences of the high-speed rotor control, the stator connections must be provided with a 360_

screen at the tube and generator end.

General remarks:

Always use screened cables: 0722 215 02054.

Shorten the stator cable to the required length.Do not accommodate excess lengths at thegenerator.

Keep stator cable separate from all the othersignal cables to avoid interference.

Earth the screen at both cable ends.

Screening procedure:

Remove any enamel or dirt from the clampproviding drag relief in the tube housing to makesure the clamp is conductive.

Remove the plastic covering around the clamp,about 1cm (0.5”).

Wrap copper foil around the visible screen of thecable until the original diameter of the cable isobtained.

Remove the present red wire going from thescreen end to the earthing point of the tubehousing.

Fix the screen of the stator cable with the clamp.Ensure that the clamp is secured and the groundcontact works!

327H97Screening of the stator cable.

Copper foil layers up tothe insulation diameter

Wire must be discarded

ROT 350 fixing clamp

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.3.2. Connection

CAUTIONDo not mix up the phases, otherwise components of the rotor control may be destroyed.

At the tube end

Place the jumpers across terminals 100 and 200according to the figure.

Connect the stator cable:

wire 1 ------> phase Uwire 2 ------> phase Vwire 3 ------> phase W

Earth the screening of the stator cable at the tubehousing with the metallic clamp.

148H94

SRO/RO

101 202

109 210

U

VW

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

At the generator end: One-tube version


Connect the stator cable to the terminal EX1100(U-V-W).

Check the stator connection by measuring theresistances:

U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 ≈ 11ΩU -- W = wire 1 -- 3 ≈ 20ΩV -- W = wire 2 -- 3 ≈ 9Ω

If an inductance meter is available, measure thefollowing inductance values:

U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 = 57mH ±10%V -- W = wire 2 -- 3 = 34mH ±10%

Fix the screen below the screening clamp.

Relieve the tension of the stator cable by a cabletie.

At the generator end: Two-tube version


Connect the stator cables to the terminalsEWG:K11/K12.

Check the stator connections of both tubes bymeasuring the resistances:




Fix the screen below the screening clamp.

Relieve the tension of the stator cables by cableties.

191H96

rotor control

tube

X1100

screeningclamp

cable tie

U V W

1 2 3

E

198H98

cable ties

tube 1 tube 2

screening clamps

WGE2 64 2 64

1 32

1 32

K11 K12

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

At the generator end: Three-tube version


Connect the stator cables to the terminalsE1WG:K12 and E2WG:K11/K12.

Check the stator connections of all 3 tubes bymeasuring the resistances:




Fix the screens below the screening clamps.

Relieve the tension of the stator cables by cableties. 348H98

tube 2

K12

1WG

screening clamps

tube 1 tube 3

K11 K12

2WGE

cable ties

2 64

1 32

2 64

13

2 132

2 64K11

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.4. Signal cables

See: -- ”Connection diagram” in section 4.-- Z1--6 ”Basic interface”.

1.4.1. Room decade cable

Connect the door switches at the generator:

EZX1: 8 <------> switch <------> 10

In case no switch is presentlink: pin 8 <------> pin 10

EZ150 K1:

max. switching and loading current = 1A

max. Load = 60VA AC= 30W DC

CAUTIONMake sure the polarity of the relay is correct.

RM DR 0V

RM DR CT

10

6CMSW

PO26V5

4

143H94

8

9

Wall junction boxUmax.=230VImax.=1A

radiationindication

door switches

EWGX3

ME

EWGX2EZX1 orroom 1room 2

SW UN EX --

+

screen

1 WG X3 room 2

2 WG X2 room 1

2 WG X3 room 3

or

Door switch connection.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

In case of tube 2 or 3 is located in room 2 or 3 orwhile room decades

-- WG X3 or-- 1WG X3 or-- 2WG X3

are intended to be used for room supervision thesoldering link WG W1 must be placed.Only when this link is placed it is guaranteed thatrelay WG K3 pulls up and room decade WG X3 isactivated when switch-over of the tube takesplace.

See Z1--14.xx ”Tube extension”.

If needed connect an external relay for eachexamination room to control external radiationwarning devices.

One relay inclusive cable is part of delivery,Additional ones can be ordered: 4512 100 4523.

A mounting place is reserved on the mainsconnection terminal MEX of the wall junction box.

CAUTIONMake sure the polarity of the relay is correct.

door switchesroom 2

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

soldering link

EWG

1

2

X13

W1

1

3

4

25

6

X11

door switchesroom 1

X1 X2 X3

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.4.2. Tube supervision

Connect the thermal switch or the thermal sensorof the tube housing assembly.

For U.S.A. and U.K. only:

Connect the HHS-lamp to indicate the selectedtube housing assembly.

1.4.3. CAN interface

Only for examination units which are provided with a CAN system interface.

Connect the following plugs:

System Connector

EZX23

signal bus

EZX42 orEZX42--1system CAN


BukyDiagnost TH / TH2 X X

DigitalDiagnost X X X

Thoravision X X X

PO 26V

10

6

7

4

190H96

9

HHS lamp24V/ max. 5W

EWGX9

3

EWGX8EZX3 or tube 2tube 1

TH OL

CM TH

TH OL SW

CM TH SW

screen

E1 WG X9 tube 2

E2 WG X8 tube 1

E2 WG X9 tube 3

or

Tube supervision connection.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.4.4. Adapter for 4 auxiliary units

Adapter for 4 auxiliary units RAD (Bucky, Tomo) WA / 1WA / 2WA used for examination units which provide theircontrol signals individually via decade cables.

Each of the release circuits and the Bucky decades can be assigned to one or several of the RGDV buttons 1...8via software programming.

Survey: ”Connection diagram” in section 4.

Z1--1.2 ”Block diagram Expansions”.

Detail: Z1--15.1 ”Adapter 4 aux. units WA / 1WA / 2WA”.

It provides:

1. 4 release decades to be used for

-- grid / syncmaster auxiliaries

-- HHS cassette present interlock

2. 2 Bucky decades to be used for

-- format size contacts (collimator, side fields ON/OFF)

-- Bucky--tomo remote switch-over

-- tomo ready condition

-- Bucky ready condition

-- HHS cassette present interlockto be activated by SW programming (see modul Configuration part 1 chapter 1.2).

After activation via SW: Signals not provided by the system must be simulated by jumpers.

3. 1 decade EXON signal for the system via opto coupler

4. 1 decade (output) for 8 tomo trajectories

5. 1 decade for 8 tomo time inputs

6. 1 decade for 8 external APRT

-- WA backpanel programmed as 1WA = 2 AUX + 6 APRT

-- WA backpanel programmed as 2WA = 8 APRT

7. 1 decade for PSC (Patient Size Correction)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.4.5. Dose inputs

Connect the measuring chambers to the D-Sub connectors EZX21 / 22 / 31 / 32 / 41.

There are no assignement restrictions because the measuring chambers are allocated to the auxiliaries in SWprogramming.

Withdrawpins 101--102--103or A--D--H formeasuring field selection at the junior / extremity measuring chamber.

These measuring chambers have only one measuring field. The terminal for the left-hand field is used in otherconfigurations for switching over intensification and must not be connected here.

NOTEAMPLIMAT cables 9803 507 0xx02 (for hybrid measuring chambers 9803 509 xxxxx) with 3-Plus plugs at both

ends must be connected in the generator by the following adapter for each cable:

Adapter for AMPLIMAT cable: 4512 108 09042. The generator includes 1 adapter.

The hybrid measuring chambers 9803 509 xxxxx require connection (chassis) between contacts

D-Sub end GND (13) <------> RF 0V (8) (generator input)

or

3-Plus end GND (N) <------> RF 0V (J) (generator input)

This connection is established by the adapter for the AMPLIMAT cable.See Z1.6 ”Basic interface” of the generator manual.

In case of a hybrid measuring chamber 9803 509 xxxxx is not operated with the required

AMPLIMAT cables 3-Plus / 3-Plus 9803 507 0xx02. . . . . . . . . .

but with

AMPLIMAT cables D-Sub / 3-Plus 9890 000 017xx. . . . . . . . . .

make sure to establish this connection (13 <------> 8) in the D-Sub connector!

For ALC measuring chambers 9890 000 016xx connection GND <------> RF 0V is not permitted.Therefore, ALC measuring chambers AMPLIMAT cables 9890 000 017xx should always be used.

1.4.6. Patient Data Organizer PDO (option)

See operator’s manual Patient Data Organizer.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06081

1.5. H.V. cables generator side


Mark the H.V. cables at the generator and the tube end with the correct polarity.

Fix the H.V. cables on the left-hand side of the wall junction box on the middle rail to provide drag relief for thecables. The short ends of the H.V. cables which are going to the H.V. generator must be routed in downwarddirection in this area.The free cable lengths including plugs should be about 1.5m.

Twist the H.V. cables counter-clockwise by one turn and connect them to the H.V. generator.The twisting of the cables allows that the H.V. cables can be put into a loop when the cabinet is placed againstthe wall.

The H.V. sockets should always be filled with some oil. At least the lower half of the plugs must be wet with oil.

CAUTIONDo not use a silicone washer.

Do not grease the plugs with silicone.

The union nuts of the high-voltage connectors must be tightened up to ensure good electrical contact for

screening.

Only high-voltage connectors which have threaded flange halves may be used.

Older high-voltage cables still have connectors where the flange halves are kept together with a spring washer.

In such cases the modification kit 4512 103 80852 is required.

1.6. Emergency-OFF circuit

Connect the emergency-OFF buttons to EZX4:1/2.If not necessary, link pins 1 - 2.

See Z1--2.1 ”Power supply” and Z2--5.2 “Backpanel Basic rack-2Z”.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

X51

X4

Rel

ease

4

X2

Bucky/Tomo interface 2

Rel

ease

3

X1

Rel

ease

2

Rel

ease

1

X24X23

PTC

X22X21

Exte

rnal

APR

T

EXO

N

Tom

o tim

es

Tom

o tra

ject

orie

s

X4X3X2

Rel

ease

4


X52

PTC

X24X23X22X21

102Universal

I/O interface

Buck

y 2

X11

EXO

N

X12 X13

Tom

o tim

es

X14

Tom

o tra

ject

orie

s

Exte

rnal

APR

T

Buck

y 2

X11 X3

Buck

y 1

Option rack

CAN/XS-Bus

102Universal

I/O interface

or

WA

X52

for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable

CAN/XS-Bus

2 WA

W

Function unit ADAP bFunction unit ADAP a

X14X13

Buck

y 1

X12

Rel

ease

3

Rel

ease

2

Rel

ease

1

X1

EZX19

CAN/XS-Bus

Block diagramExpansions

Z1-1.2

Schr

./Kö

02-0

3-19

A1/A

3

4512 983 05751c Philips Medical Systems

(97.0)

Termination resistor

EZX45CAN/XS-BusX51 X52

EZX45or1WA X52

15 pin

2WA X52whoever is thelast in line

X42

Adaptor decade cable

26VDCX41

for 4 aux. units

X4226VDCEZX19

X41X42

1 WA for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable

102Universal

I/O interface

Function unit ADAP _a

Tom

o tim

es

X21

EXO

N

X14

Tom

o tra

ject

orie

s

X22X13

Exte

rnal

APR

T

X23


Buck

y 2

X12

PTC

X24

Buck

y 1

X11

Rel

ease

4

X4R

elea

se 3

X3

Rel

ease

2

X2

Rel

ease

1

X1

X51

EZX45

26VDCX41

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

EZ139

:4

Central unit

Discharging circuit

EQ/E2Q

42

47R34 R3 system resetRESET SW/

24V-/230V Low~ mA

L1

PEPE

N

L3

L2

47R

N

47RR1

RD MN ON/

EZX13:1

ready mains power on

AC 230V L2

EZX13:2

PW ON PO

EZX13:3

PW ON NGPO 12V +12V supply

MNON/ mains on

N

T1

K21

13 14

Adaptation K1

:2EZX15::1

RESET SW/ PW ON NG ST PH ID PW ON PO

EZ102EZ119

L2 L3

T1

L1

5A

low voltage

F3

supply(option) Control voltage

supply

EZX14:1 :2

Power supply

Z1-2.1

EN

X1:4

02-0

3-19

T2

T3

L2

T3L3L3

X1101X1102

F210A

L1

Mains supply

E

~

3 400V50, 60Hz

Stand (s)~3 400V

50, 60Hzmax. 5A

Schr

./Kö

A2/

A3

c

F1

MEX

MEX

Wall junction box

K1

L1

AC 230V L1

AC 0V XGEZX47:7 EZX47:2 EZX47:1

EZX44:14

EZX46:7

EZ130

PO 12V

K1

V9X3:2

V1

X1:2

V10T1X3:3

X1:7

X3:1

X1:6

MN EM OF

X1:5

V3

ST PH ID

EZX47:9

100circuit

Power on

:5

V2

912

3

R35K11

2

S1

5K11R1

R41K

K1

V6

100 m

C2V8 R5

V7

10K R6

H1

V5

1K

R2

V4

K1

15R

kV Control

65/80kW=40A

L1

T1 T2 T3

K2

41

2

1

4

33

3

6

5

5

9

12

K1

X2:2

5

X2:1

K2

5K1

8

N

m47

X1:1

A1

A2

1

2

RC1A1

X1:9

A2

K2

C1

8

Mnemonic's

mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC 0V XGmains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L1mains supply 230V AC phase 2AC 230V L2

GND 12V ground +12V supply50kW=25A

MN EM OF mains power emergency off2T1

DC supply relay power on -

RD MN ON/

OFF

MN ON/

EZX46:15

Emergency

EZX4:2

EZX46:14

EZX4:1

EZX46:6

EZX47:6

EZX44:6

GND 12V

DC supply relay power on +

(97.0)Philips Medical Systems

4512 983 05761

6

L3

4

L2

T2

23

3

kV Power unit

R224

EYA

L2 L3

WGRotor control

T2

N

EWN

T3

L3 N

Tube extension(option)

DeskC

ONOFF

Second

(option)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

EZ139

:4

Central unit

Discharging circuit

EQ/E2Q

42

47R34 R3 system resetRESET SW/

24V-/230V Low~ mA

L1

PEPE

N

L3

L2

47R

N

47RR1

RD MN ON/

EZX13:1

ready mains power on

AC 230V L2

EZX13:2

PW ON PO

EZX13:3

PW ON NGPO 12V +12V supply

MNON/ mains on

N

T1

K21

13 14

Adaptation K1

:2EZX15::1

RESET SW/ PW ON NG ST PH ID PW ON PO

EZ102EZ119

L2 L3

T1

L1

5A

low voltage

F3

supply(option) Control voltage

supply

EZX14:1 :2

for digital DIAGNOST

Z1-2.1.1

EN

X1:4

02-0

3-19

T2

T3

L2

T3L3L3

X1101X1102

F210A

L1

Mains supply

E

~

3 400V50, 60Hz

Stand (s)mains supply 230V AC

50, 60Hzmax. 5A

Schr

./Kö

A2/

A3

c

F1

MEX

MEX

Wall junction box

K1

L1

AC 230V L1

AC 0V XGEZX47:7 EZX47:2 EZX47:1

EZX44:14

EZX46:7

EZ130

PO 12V

K1

V9X3:2

V1

X1:2

V10T1X3:3

X1:7

X3:1

X1:6

MN EM OF

X1:5

V3

ST PH ID

EZX47:9

100circuit

Power on

:5

V2

912

3

R35K11

2

S1

5K11R1

R41K

K1

V6

100 m

C2V8 R5

V7

10K R6

H1

V5

1K

R2

V4

K1

15R

kV Control

65/80kW=40A

L1

T1 T2 T3

K2

41

2

1

4

33

3

6

5

5

9

12

K1

X2:2

5

X2:1

K2

5K1

8

N

m47

X1:1

A1

A2

1

2

RC1A1

X1:9

A2

K2

C1

8

Mnemonic's

mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC 0V XGmains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L1mains supply 230V AC phase 2AC 230V L2

GND 12V ground +12V supply50kW=25A

MN EM OF mains power emergency off2T1

DC supply relay power on -

RD MN ON/

OFF

MN ON/

EZX46:15

Emergency

EZX4:2

EZX46:14

EZX4:1

EZX46:6

EZX47:6

EZX44:6

GND 12V

DC supply relay power on +

(02.0)Philips Medical Systems

4512 983 05951

6

L3

4

L2

T2

23

3

kV Power unit

R224

EYA

L2 L3

WGRotor control

T2

N

EWN

T3

L3 N

Tube extension(option)

DeskC

ONOFF

Second

(option) Power supply

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

:2EZX15:1:2EZX14:1

EZX13:3

EZX13:2

..03

..11

..08

T3

..05

..02

L3

L3

..04

..12

..09

..06

..03

X1102X1101

400V

440V

460V

480V

L1

..02

Low

K1

TX1206

Thermo fuse

GND 12V

TX1205

X2:1

5

X2:2

47RR1

5 12

14K213

EZX46:7

PO 12V

RESET SW/

m

EPE

L3 T3

PE

T2

X1103

X1102 L2

L3

L2

6

5

N

AC 230V L1

AC 0V XG

AC 230V L2

L3

PW ON NG

EZX47:9

X1:9

K1

2 1

100Power on

t

K2

N

EZX44:6

X1:1

EZX44:14

EZX47:1

N

with mains transformer

kV Control

:4

EZ130

:5

EN

Power supply

PW ON POSI PH ID

A1

A2

T1L1

T

L1

33 34 R3

41

47R

42

kV Power unitEQ/E2Q

L2

Discharging circuit

WN

Z = 20 m at 50 HziZ = 23 m at 60 Hzi

T3T2T1

F35A

24 R23

47R

4

23

56

X3:1

t

X3:3

Thermo fuse

Connected accordingto mains voltage.

T1 V10

V9 15R

X1:6

R35K11

EZX46:14EZX46:15 EZX46:6

EZX47:7

EZX4:1

EZX47:6

OFFEmergency

EZX47:2

X1:2

V1

K1 V247m

C1

EZX13:1

100

C2

circuit

PW ON NG

X3:2

PW ON PO

L3

RD MN ON/

10A

RESET SW/ready mains power on

X1:5

Surge arrester

Mains supply

Mnemonic's

AC 230V L1 mains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L2

Stand (s)

max. 5A


4512 983 05941

Schr

./Kö

SI PH ID

system reset

L3 N

single phase identifier

10K R6

H1

1K R4R1

5K11

R2

V4

8 8

(option)

K19 K2

Adaptation

65/80kW=40AK1L1

X1101

1

A1 RC1A2 2

ONOFF

Wall junction box50kW=25A

mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC OV XG

mains supply 230V AC phase 2

ground +12V supplyGND 12V3 400V...480V

~

50, 60Hz

mains power emergency offMN EM OFmains onMNON/

PO 12V +12V supplyDC supply relay power on -DC supply relay power on +

V3

X1:4

MEX

T2

T3

MEX

N

T1

F1

L2

PE

L3

L1

N

1

2

T1

L1

3

4

..10

..07

..04

TX 1101

T2

L2

L2

Z1-2.2

EZX4:2

(97.1)

A2/

A3

L2L1

02-0

3-19

K2

50, 60Hz~3 400V

F2

TX1201

mAEZ119 EZ102

supplyControl voltage

~(option)

24V-/230V

RD MN ON/

EWNSecond

MN ON/

supplylow voltage

WG

(option)Tube extension K1

EYA

EZ139

Rotor control

Central unit

CDesk

9

3

K112

S12

V6

X1:7

V7R51K

V5

V8

MN EM OF

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

:2EZX15:1:2EZX14:1

EZX13:3

EZX13:2

..03

..11

..08

T3

..05

..02

L3

L3

..04

..12

..09

..06

..03

X1102X1101

400V

440V

460V

480V

L1

..02

Low

K1

TX1206

Thermo fuse

GND 12V

TX1205

X2:1

5

X2:2

47RR1

5 12

14K213

EZX46:7

PO 12V

RESET SW/

m

EPE

L3 T3

PE

T2

X1103

X1102 L2

L3

L2

6

5

N

AC 230V L1

AC 0V XG

AC 230V L2

L3

PW ON NG

EZX47:9

X1:9

K1

2 1

100Power on

t

K2

N

EZX44:6

X1:1

EZX44:14

EZX47:1

N

with mains transformer

kV Control

:4

EZ130

:5

EN

Power supply

PW ON POSI PH ID

A1

A2

T1L1

T

L1

33 34 R3

41

47R

42

kV Power unitEQ/E2Q

L2

Discharging circuit

WN

Z = 20 m at 50 HziZ = 23 m at 60 Hzi

T3T2T1

F35A

24 R23

47R

4

23

56

X3:1

t

X3:3

Thermo fuse

Connected accordingto mains voltage.

T1 V10

V9 15R

X1:6

R35K11

EZX46:14EZX46:15 EZX46:6

EZX47:7

EZX4:1

EZX47:6

OFFEmergency

EZX47:2

X1:2

V1

K1 V247m

C1

EZX13:1

100

C2

circuit

PW ON NG

X3:2

PW ON PO

L3

RD MN ON/

10A

RESET SW/ready mains power on

X1:5

Surge arrester

Mains supply

Mnemonic's

AC 230V L1 mains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L2

Stand (s)

max. 5A


4512 983 05961

Schr

./Kö

SI PH ID

system reset

L3 N

single phase identifier

10K R6

H1

1K R4R1

5K11

R2

V4

8 8

(option)

K19 K2

Adaptation

65/80kW=40AK1L1

X1101

1

A1 RC1A2 2

ONOFF

Wall junction box50kW=25A

mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC OV XG

mains supply 230V AC phase 2

ground +12V supplyGND 12V3 400V...480V

~

50, 60Hz

mains power emergency offMN EM OFmains onMNON/

PO 12V +12V supplyDC supply relay power on -DC supply relay power on +

V3

X1:4

MEX

T2

T3

MEX

N

T1

F1

L2

PE

L3

L1

N

1

2

T1

L1

3

4

..10

..07

..04

TX 1101

T2

L2

L2

Z1-2.2.1

EZX4:2

(02.0)

A2/

A3

L2L1

02-0

3-20

K2

50, 60Hzmains supply 230V AC

F2

TX1201

mAEZ119 EZ102

supplyControl voltage

~(option)

24V-/230V

RD MN ON/

EWNSecond

MN ON/

supplylow voltage

WG

(option)Tube extension K1

EYA

EZ139

Rotor control

Central unit

CDesk

9

3

K112

S12

V6

X1:7

V7R51K

V5

V8

MN EM OF

for digital DIAGNOST

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

EZX2

1:1

EZX3

1:3

EZX4

1:6

EZX3

1:4

EZX4

1:5

EZX2

2:1

EZX3

2:6

EZX3

2:5

EZX3

1:11

EZX2

2:6

EZX2

2:4

EZX3

1:12

RM

DR

CT

Doo

r

cool

ing

unit

door

con

tact

(02.0)

read

y

(Opt

ion)

LS R

otor

con

trol

Philips Medical Systems

- cha

mbe

r vol

tage

400

V D

C

Schr

./Kö

02-0

4-18

A1/A

3

c

EZX2

1:4

EZX5

1:9

X1:C

25

SEL

CH

NO

NE/

- +

400V

9890

000

023

32 /

4512

108

090

4x

Offs

et m

emor

y 15V

5

40V

or

15V

X1:C

3

FD C

CH

1

FD L

CH

1

Adap

ter f

or A

MPL

IMAT

cab

le (n

ot fo

r OPT

IMU

S C

)

AMPL

IMA

Tin

terfa

ce

PO 1

5/40

VX5

-SE

L_ C

H1.

..5type

cont

rol

cham

ber

W1

SIG

N C

H3

RF

0V C

H3

X1:C

13

X1:C

14

Chamber control (transistor or CMOS)

EZX3

1:7

EZX3

1:8

3

Chamber selection

X2:A

3

X5X6

X2:C

3

CAN

L

CAN

H

Supp

ress

or

X2:C

7

X2:C

6

X2:A

6

EN X

C/

XRG - Bus

CTR

L X

C/

RES

ET__

C/

EZX2

1:3

EZX2

1:12

EZX2

1:11

X1:A

26

X1:A

25

SIG

N C

H1

inte

rface

Low

spe

ed ro

tor c

ontro

lR

C R

D/

X1:C

29

X1:A

29

CAN

- an

noun

cem

ent

Wat

ch d

og e

rror

Rea

dy

CM

SW

SW U

N E

X

K1

+

Mai

n co

ntro

ller

X1:C

07

X1:C

26

1 553 322 4 44

EZ13

9

1 2 3 4 5

EZX2

1:13

1EZ

X22:

132

EZX3

1:13

3EZ

X32:

134

EZX4

1:13

5

EZX4

1:11

2 3

EZX3

2:4

EZX3

2:3

EZX3

2:12

EZX4

1:12

EZX4

1:3

EZX4

1:4

EZX2

2:12

1

EZX2

2:11

EZX2

2:3

EZX3

2:11

EZX2

2:5

15

EZX5

1:1

C

RL

5 6 7

1...5

cham

ber

Mea

surin

g

12 13EZ

X31

EZX3

2EZ

X41

from

"Rea

dy"

8 11 12

FD R

Cen

tral u

nit

X1:C

4

EZ15

0 L N P1)

Basi

c in

terfa

ce

DS

MC

SG

X4 PO 4

00V

10K

A D

10K

PO 1

5/40

V

GN

D

NG

15V

C

+15VX3

-

W2

+

PNL5 13 6

X1:A

4

X1:A

5

X1:A

6

FD C

CH

2

X1:C

9

FD R

CH

2

X1:C

10

REL

CH

2

X1:C

11

X1:C

12

X1:A

9

FD L

CH

3

FD C

CH

3

FD R

CH

3

REL

CH

3

FD L

CH

4

DS

MC

0V

X2:A

16

+15V

REL

CH

5

FD R

CH

5

FD C

CH

5

X1:C

18

W3

FD L

CH

5

X1:C

17

REL

CH

4

X1:C

16

FD R

CH

4

X1:C

15

PO 1

5/40

V

FD C

CH

4

X1:A

12

X1:A

20

X1:A

11

X1:A

10

X1:C

1X1

:A1

only

451

2 10

8 05

963

X2:C

16

right

fiel

d m

easu

ring

cham

ber 1

...5

X4 X6

"

X5 H1

RES

ET F

U

room

doo

r con

tact

EZ15

0

sele

ct c

ham

ber 1

...5

DS

MC

0V

cham

ber n

ot s

elec

ted

EN X

C/

radi

atio

n in

dica

tion

DS

MC

SG

cham

ber

stat

us

Mea

surin

g

from

ear

th

Sign

al g

roun

d

Mea

sure

men

t of

AMPL

IMAT

ram

p.

shou

ld b

e is

olat

ed

L

EZX3

1:6

EZX2

1:6

EZX3

1:5

EZX2

1:5

EZX4

1:1

EZX3

2:1

EZX3

1:1

sign

al m

easu

ring

cham

ber

room

doo

r con

tact

0V

sign

al m

easu

ring

cham

ber 1

...5

rele

ase

cham

ber

"

+40V

sup

ply

+26V

sup

ply

roto

r con

trol o

n

+15V

sup

ply

roto

r con

trol r

eady

+15/

40V

supp

ly

roto

r con

trol s

tato

r 2

"

0V re

fere

nce

valu

e m

easu

ring

cham

ber

"

0V re

fere

nce

valu

e m

easu

ring

cham

ber 1

...5

rele

ase

(rese

t int

egra

tor)

cham

ber 1

...5

1 2

Tube

ext

ensi

on

Rad

iatio

n in

dica

tion

LS R

otor

con

trol

(Opt

ion)

(Opt

ion)

PH

R

E JN

Cen

tral u

nit

3 PL

US

1) =

451

2 10

8 09

042

EZX1

:6

EZX1

:4

EZX1

6:1

EZX1

6:2

X2:A

C11

X2:A

C12

X2:A

C1

RF

0V

X2:A

C2

FD L

FD C

X2:A

C4

test

sig

nal

X2:A

C5

REL

PO 4

00V

SIG

N

EZ13

9

X2:A

C14

PO 2

6V

supp

lyLo

w v

olta

ge

NG

15V

EZ10

2

X4

5 13 6 3 4

1

1

11

7

3 4 8

Basic interface

Z1-6

FD R

CH

1

REL

CH

1

FD L

FD C

FD R

RF

0V8 11 12

REL

CH

J A D

REL

CH

5

SIG

N C

H5

RF

0V C

H5

x 1

or

4

RF

0V C

H4

X1:C

20

X1:C

19

SIG

N C

H4

X1:A

14

X1:A

13

X1:C

18

X1:C

5

X1:C

6 J A D H E C R

REL

PO 4

00V

SIG

N

3 4 1 7

H E C R

DR

C S

W

with

sof

twar

e pr

ogra

mm

ing

X1:A

15

"AM

PLIM

AT s

ensi

tivity

"

X1:A

16

X7

Phot

osen

sor/a

mpl

imat

inpu

t

EZX2

1:7

CU

CT1

2

rd

CU

CT1

1

H1

RM

DR

0V

EZX4

5:8

WB

X51:

8W

BX2

2:8

RC

ST

3/

RC

ST

2/

RC

ON

/

X1:A

3FD

L C

H2

SIG

N C

H2

Selft

est

X1:A

7

Star

t

RF

0V C

H2

X1:A

82

STAT

US

EZX2

2:7

EZX2

2:8

RF

0V C

H1

EZX2

1:8

1

cool

ing

unit

inte

rface

Roo

m a

nd

X1:C

22EZ

X2:7

X1:A

22EZ

X2:6

X1:C

28EZ

X1:1

0

X1:A

28EZ

X1:8

X1:C

08

X8G

ND

W1

=

+40V

=

W2

-15V

+15V 989

0 00

0 02

331/

4512

108

083

01

EZX2

1EZ

X22

= ga

in fa

ctor

1

supp

ly v

olta

ge fo

r cha

mbe

r am

plifi

er =

15V

= tra

nsis

tor d

river

Def

ault

prog

ram

min

g:

X6

mus

t be

set i

n ac

cord

ancex 1

1W

4

xx

1 o

r 4

gain

EZX3

2:8

EZX3

2:7

4

W1.

..W4

and

40V

gene

ratio

n fro

m 4

512

108

0596

4 on

war

ds.

NG

15V

X1 X3 X2

3ON

OFF

ON

Rem

arks

:

W1:

W2:

W3:

W4:

CM

SW

L

C

R

- pow

er s

uppl

y

- exp

osur

e co

mm

and

- fie

ld s

elec

tion

CTR

L X

C/

CU

CT1

11

2

DS

MC

0V

DS

MC

SG

EN X

C/

"

NG

15V

PO 5

VPO

15V

FD C

CH

1...5

cool

ing

unit

cont

act 1

1

FD L

CH

1...5

PO 2

6VPO

40V

FD R

CH

1...5

RC

ON

/

PO 4

00V

PO 1

5/40

V

-

RC

ST

2/ 3/

Dos

e m

easu

ring

cham

ber 0

V

SIG

N C

H

RF

0V C

HR

ESET

C/

REL

CH

1...5

RM

DR

0V

RM

DR

CT

Dos

e m

easu

ring

cham

ber s

igna

l

enab

le X

-ray

com

man

d

-15V

sup

ply

SW U

N E

X

SEL

CH

1...5

RF

0V C

H1.

..5

+5V

supp

ly

SIG

N C

H1.

..5

"

SEL

CH

NO

NE/

cent

re fi

eld

mea

surin

g ch

ambe

r 1...

5le

ft fie

ld m

easu

ring

cham

ber 1

...5

X3

+400

V su

pply

mea

surin

g ch

ambe

r

cont

rol X

-ray

com

man

d

RC

RD

/

CAN

LC

AN H

com

mon

for r

adia

tion

indi

catio

nge

nera

tor C

AN lo

w

REL

CH

gene

rato

r CAN

hig

h

Mne

mon

ic's

3

1...5

cham

bers

Mea

surin

g

-+

+5V

x

+5V

x 4

PO 5

V

NG

15V

PO 1

5V

EZX4

1:8

from

EZX4

1:7

EZX4

1:4

5

-15V

+26V

SIG

N C

H

RF

0V C

H

+15V

4512 983 05531

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

1)

EY100X3

High speed

X12

rotor control

X11X11

controlX15X14X14 control

1)

X14W1

Soldering link

(tube 3)

X62

X67

K1

1WG

K5

Tube extension

X57N

X61

X72

ENF3:L3

1) Connect here iflow speed rotorcontrol is present

ENX1101

X83

X84

WGTube extension

K122

K111

WG

Statorconnectorstube

Ost

./Kö

(b/98.0)

02-0

3-19

A2/

A3


Tube supervision

X1

Cooling unit control 2

3rd tube in room 2

K2

X13

X5

K3

X3

K3

W1

EZX3

K11 K12

EZX2


EZX16

EZ150

Soldering link

Room decade 2

K5

X11

X57

Z1-14.1

GWBH.V. changeover switch

Tube extension overview

X1101

X1102

X1103

X84

2WG

X83

Tube extension

X81

X82

X68

X67

K5

X62

X72

X65

X57

X84

Room decade 1

X64

X83

K1

X52

tube 2

X81

X3

X82

K12

X2

X68

X5

Room decade 3

X7

X4

Tube extensions for 3 tubes

K1 K2

EZX11

(tube 3)

EZX16

EZ130

EY100X3

kV control

EZ150

Tube 1+3 Tube 2

Basis interface

Tube 1+2 Tube 3

rotor controlTube 1

High speed

Tube 2+3

Tube 1 Tube 2

Room 1 Room 2 Room 3 cable soldering soldering1WGX13-2WGX13 link 2WGWlink 1WGW

-Tube 3 XX

X XX

-X X

X --

K5

K12K11

X3

Cooling unit

K3X1

K3

Room decade

K5K2K1

tube2

K1

tube3

K2

tube1

K1

tube2/3

K2

EGH.V. generator

ENX1101

K12K1131

K12

2WG

K112

1WG

Statorconnectorstube

X13

X14W1

Soldering linkX11

X52 X65

X4EZX2K5

X6

X7

X5

EZX3

Cooling unit

Cooling unit 1

Cooling unit 2

EZX1

K2

X8

K11

K12

X51~

X9

230V

Room decade 2

Tube supervision 1

X2

N

X9

X8

X6

K12

X2

K11

X7

X4

X1EZX1

K2

Rotor controlStator supply 1

K12

K5

Stator supply 2

K3

K11

Tube supervision

Tube supervision 2

K3K5K2K1

Room decade

Room decade 1

Stator supply 2

X61

ENF3:L3X63

X51

X64

~

Rotor control

Basis interface

EZ130

kV control

Tube extension for 2 tubes

Stator supply 3

Tube supervision 2

X51

K11

X61

Stator supply 1

X63

X9

X8

Tube supervision 3

X6

Tube supervision 1



EG

230V

or H.V. change overswitch GWB

X81

H.V. generatorX82

tube2

K5

tube1

K2

X68

X72

X67

K1X62

X63

X65X52

X64

K1

EZX11

4512 983 05541

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

RM

DR

0V

RM

DR

CT

2C

M S

WSW

UN

EX

2

SW U

N E

X 1

GND

TB 3

/

Coo

ling

unit

2/3

PO 1

5V 2

GND

TH O

L 1

CM

TH

TH O

L SW

1

CM

TH

SW

PO 2

6V 1

X8:1

0

Tube

sup

ervi

sion

1

X15:

1

X12:

4

X8:9

X5:9

X5:1

0

X5:8

X5:7

X6:3

X5:6

X6:6

X5:3

X6:7

X6:8

X6:9

X8:3

X8:4

X8:6

X8:7

X6:1

0

X3:1

0

X3:6

X3:4

X2:9

X2:6

X2:4

X2:1

0

X2:8

X2:5

X3:8

X3:5

X3:9

X1:8

W1

X1:1

0X1

:5X1

:9

Sold

erin

g lin

k

stat

or 1

A1

A1stat

or 2

/3

X4:3

X4:6

X4:7

V6

X4:8

X4:9

A2

V7A

2

X7:3

X7:4

X7:9

K3

X12:

2

K5

K2

TH O

L 2

CM

TH

TH O

L SW

2

CM

TH

SW

GND

PO 2

6V 2

tube

1

Tube

sup

ervi

sion

2/3

CM

SW

CM

TH

Mne

mon

ic's

:

X1:4

X9:4

X9:6

X9:3

X9:7

X9:9

GND

X9:1

0

X61

X62

X63

SW C

U2 O

N

Coo

ling

unit

1

CU

CT1

2

X7:1

0

CU2

CT1

1PO

26V

K1

K5

GND

PO 1

5V 1

SW C

U1 O

N

Roo

m d

ecad

e 2/

3

CU

CT1

2

X64

CU1

CT1

1PO

26V

X7:7

X65

Roo

m d

ecad

e 1

X51

GND

1 2

CU

CT1

1

CU2

CT1

1

EXON

PO 1

5V 1

PO 1

5V 2

PO 2

6V 2

switc

h co

olin

g un

it 1 o

n

RC

ST

2/

switc

h co

olin

g un

it 2 o

n

V4R

3R

2

tube

hou

sing

ove

rload

R1

tube

hou

sing

ove

rload

1

tube

hou

sing

ove

rload

sw

itch

tube

hou

sing

ove

rload

sw

itch

1

B1

2

V5

2TH

OL

1

X12:

03

TH O

L SW

X57

X72

STU

Rot

or co

ntro

l

WG / 1WG / 2WGTube extension

Z1-14.2

2 4 6

1 3 5

K11

2

1

4

3

6

5

K12

X84

X82

PO 1

5V

CU C

T1 1

PO 2

6V ~L3

(230

V )

PO 1

5VCU

CT1

2

X4:1

0

GN

DPO

26V

RM

DR

0V

RM

DR

CT

SW U

N E

X

RC S

T 3/

GN

D

tube

2/3

PO 2

6VPO

26V

1

PO 1

5V

N

Stat

or s

uppl

y 1

RM

DR

CT

CU1

CT1

1

RM

DR

0V

RM

DR

CT

1R

M D

R C

T 2

STU

Stat

or s

uppl

y 2/3

STV

STW

TB 3

RT/

SW C

U1 O

NSW

CU2

ON

SW U

N E

XSW

UN

EX

1

TB 2

/

SW U

N E

X 2

TB 3

/

TB 2

RT/

TB 2

RT/

TH O

LTB

3 R

T/

Ack

now

ledg

emen

tvi

a se

lect

ion

ofw

ork

stat

ion

TH O

L SW

1

STV

GN

D

PO 2

6V

CM T

H S

W

TH O

L SW

CM

TH

TH O

L

Coo

ling

unit

cont

rol

CM

SW

X11:

5

stat

or 2

/3

GN

D

TB 3

/

tube

2/3

24V,

5W

A1/A

302

-03-

19O

st.K

ö


Con

trol

PO 2

6V

(c/97.1)

TB 2

/

Roo

m d

ecad

e

RC S

T 2/

Tube

sup

ervi

sion

PO 2

6V

X7:6

X52

X11:

3

X11:

6

STW

RC

ST

3/

CM

SW

RM

DR

CT

1

RM

DR

0V

PO 2

6VG

ND

24V

DC

, max

. 3W

PO 2

6V

door

cont

act

EXO

Nin

dica

tion

24V

DC

, max

. 3W

2

2

31 2

indi

catio

nEX

ON

K3

K4

X41

X11:

2

K1

X11:

1

K2

K2

door

cont

act

24V,

5W

15V

supp

ly

26V

supp

ly

expo

sure

on

tube

2tu

be 3

stat

or li

ne U

stat

or li

ne V

stat

or li

ne W

tube

3 re

turn

com

mon

tube

hou

sing

tube

2 re

turn

room

doo

r con

tact

cool

ing

unit c

onta

ct 1

1

15V

supp

ly o

ptio

nal 1

15V

supp

ly o

ptio

nal 2

26V

supp

ly o

ptio

nal 1

room

doo

r con

tact

1

cool

ing

unit 1

con

tact

1 1

26V

supp

ly o

ptio

nal 2

room

doo

r con

tact

2

cool

ing

unit 2

con

tact

1 1

roto

r con

trol

sta

tor 2

room

doo

r con

tact

0V

3/

com

mon

tube

hou

sing

sw

itch

com

mon

for r

adia

tion

indi

catio

n

X68

X69

X83

CM

TH

SW

C1

tube

1

X81

X67

X13:

1

X43

K11

K12 X4

2

K4

X13:

2

V1

tube

2/3

K5

X11:

4

V2

X14:

1X1

4:2

V3

room

2/3

X12:

1

X1:6

4512 983 05551

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

X1:C

27SL

TO

TM

8

X1:A

27SL

TO

TM

7

X1:C

26SL

TO

TM

6

X1:A

26

X1:C

25

SL T

O T

M 5

X1:A

25

SL T

O T

M 4

10tra

ject

orie

s

WA / 1WA / 2WAAdapter 4 auxil. units

Z1-15.1

X2:A

9

X2:C

9

CO

M E

X C

D

X1:A

24

X1:C

24

EX C

D

IT 0

V

SL T

O T

M 1

SL T

O T

M 2

SL T

O T

M 3

K18

10R

EX O

N

X1:C

19

X1:A

12

X1:C

12

SW B

U 1

SW B

U 2

4 5 8

10

9

8 9

X1:A

21

X14

1 2 3

X13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

X AC

T/

EX C

D

t

500.

..600

ms

RQ

PQ

/

EXO

N

t

X1:A

10

4

3

4

X1:A

4

4

X1:C

6

3 4

X1:C

8

PO 2

6V R

E

X1:C

10

X1:A

C1

6 7 10

X1:C

205 6 7 82 3 4

codi

ng

gene

rato

r CAN

hig

h ac

tive

gene

rato

r CAN

low

act

ive

Expa

nsio

ns

GN

D S

or P

O 0

V

NR

PR

X/

PO 2

6V

expo

sure

end

grou

nd

com

mon

for e

xpos

ure

end

expo

sure

on

PO 2

6V R

E

RES

ET C

/

sign

al b

us e

nabl

e X-

ray

RQ

PR

/R

G D

V 1.

..4

sign

al b

us X

-ray

requ

est c

omm

and

RQ

PR

HS

sign

al b

us g

roun

d

+26V

sup

ply

emitt

er 0

V ex

posu

re o

n si

gnal

+26V

sup

ply

reve

rse

not r

eady

pre

parin

g fo

r X-ra

y

regi

stra

tion

devi

cesy

stem

RES

ET c

omm

and

requ

est p

repa

ratio

n

SW T

O 1

SW S

F C

F 2

SW T

O 2

TOM

O P

GTO

PG

1...

8TO

PG

SL

(SW

pro

gram

mab

le in

Dat

a Se

t A)

requ

est p

repa

ratio

n fro

m h

ands

witc

h

X AC

T/

V15

S or

PO

V

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

exp

osur

e

switc

h bu

cky

2

XG R

D E

X 1.

..4

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

fluo

rosc

opy

switc

h to

mog

raph

y 1

tom

o pr

ogra

m

switc

h to

mog

raph

y 2

sele

ct X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

tom

ogra

phy

tom

o m

ode

prog

ram

med

tom

o pr

ogra

m s

elec

ted

sign

al b

us +

15V

supp

ly

sign

al b

us X

-ray

activ

e

switc

h si

de fi

eld

to c

entra

l fie

ld b

ucky

mea

surin

g ch

ambe

r 1sw

itch

side

fiel

d to

cen

tral f

ield

buc

ky m

easu

ring

cham

ber 2

X-ra

y ge

nera

tor r

eady

for e

xpos

ure

requ

est

10

X1:A

13

X2:A

25R

Q S

N X

/

K13

PO 2

6V

RQ

XG

PR

1

RQ

XG

PR

2

RQ

XG

PR

3

RQ

XG

PR

4

X41:

1 PO 2

6V

CTR

L X/

RD

PR

X

X2:C

25

EN X

/N

R P

R X

/X2

:C26

W1

Selft

est

Star

t

Rea

dy

Erro

r

CAN

- an

noun

cem

ent

+m

ax.:

26V

1

10m

A

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Tom

o

X22

Tom

o tim

es

35

Form

at

6 7

(97.0)

8 9 10

X1:C

31

ADAP

_ b

ADAP

_ a

ADAP

_ a

===

2WA

1WA

WA

Func

tion

unit


Rel

ease

con

trol

(gal

vani

c de

coup

led)

1

2X23

4 5 6 7 8 9

SLPG

1

SLPG

2

SLPG

3

SLPG

4

SLPG

5

SLPG

6

6 7

Schr

./Kö

A1/A

3

Rel

ease

1(5

)

X2R

elea

se 2

(6)

c

Rel

ease

3(7

)

X3

)

Rel

ease

4(8

)

from

451

2 10

8 08

043

onw

ards

:- K

1 in

XG

RD

EX c

ircui

t

- sig

nal E

X C

D a

dded

K1V9

max

. 26V

,5A

1 3 10

+

+26V

GN

D2

RQ

PR

HS

RQ

XG

PR

02-0

3-19

X1 1

- V9

: max

. I in

crea

sed

from

1A

to 5

A

X1:A

3

+5V

8 9

K1

K14

K15

X1:C

4

Rel

ease

1...

4

K16

X1:A

7

RG

DV

1

K17

X1:A

9

X1:A

11

X1:A

5

5

8 9

X2:A

C14

V15

SPO

V

DC

GN

D S

X2:A

C15

PO 0

V

DC

CAN

H

CAN

L

RES

ET C

/

X2:A

C27

CO

D 1

CO

D 2

CO

D 3

+15V

X2:C

3

X2:A

3

X2:A

6

X2:A

21

X2:C

21

X2:A

22

Buck

y 2(

4)

X12

open

ed:

X11

1

2 3 4

SW S

F C

F 1

SW S

F C

F 2

Test

PR

EP

S2

Test

FLU

OR

O

S1

X1:A

30

X1:C

30

X21

TO P

G 1

TO P

G 2

TO P

G 3

TO P

G 4

TO P

G 5

TO P

G 6

TO P

G 7

X1:C

13

X1:A

14

X1:C

14

X1:A

15

X1:C

15

X1:A

16

SL P

G 7

X1:C

16

X1:A

17

X1:C

17

X41:

2

X52

W2

W1

W2

W3

requ

est s

ynch

roni

zatio

nR

Q S

N X

/R

Q X

G E

XR

Q X

G F

LR

Q X

G P

R1.

..4

inte

rface

K5 K4 K7 K6

PO 2

6VX AC

T/ W12

W13

GN

D 2

X42:

2

7

RG

DVS

L(n)

RG

DVS

L(m

)

WA

or 1

WA

2WA

I/O

Bidi

rect

iona

l

inte

rface

stat

us

X1:A

28

X1:C

28

X1:A

31

H1

K9

X1:A

18

X1:A

20

X1:C

18

X1:A

19

SL X

G T

O

SW T

O 1

SW T

O 2

9

EXO

N

1010

CM

EX

SW 1

clos

ed:

CM

EX

SW 2

CM

EX

SW 3

CM

EX

SW 4

X1:C

11

TO P

G 1

...8

K12

TO P

G S

L

RG

DV

2

RG

DV

35

RG

DV

45

RQ

XG

FL

6

GN

D 2

6 7

6 7 9

8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5PTC

X24

SL P

G 1

TOM

O P

G

SL P

G 2

SL P

G 3

TO P

G S

L

SL P

G 4

SL P

G 5

SL P

G 6

PO 2

6V

PO 2

6V

SL C

O 1

SL C

O 2

WA

1WA X5

1X4 1

1R

Q X

G E

X1

TO P

G 8

Exte

rnal

APR

T

K3

C75

I/O brai

n

X2:A

C28

2

Tom

o

X1:A

C2

X1:C

5

X1:C

7

X1:C

9

K14.

..K17

K4...

K11

K1R

Q P

R/

RQ

XG

FL

+26V

2 4 5 6 7 8 9

K2

GN

D2

W3

K8 K11

K10

K12

CAN

/XS

bus

PO 2

6V R

E

X42:

1

5

for

for

EZX4

5/

orEZ

X19

EZX4

5or

/W

NX2

1

1WA

X42

/ 1

WA

X52

for

2W

A

X2:A

24

X2:C

24

RQ

PR

/

sele

ct c

orre

ctio

n 1

(thic

knes

s)se

lect

cor

rect

ion

2 (th

ickn

ess)

sele

ct e

xt A

PRT

prog

ram

sele

ct to

mo

time

switc

h bu

cky

1

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

pre

para

tion

com

mon

for e

xpos

ure

switc

h of

regi

stra

tion

devi

ce

SL C

O 1

SL C

O 2

SL P

G 1

...8

SL T

O T

M 1

...8

SL X

G T

OSW

BU

1SW

BU

2SW

SF

CF

1

K14

X1:C

3XG

RD

EX

1

K15

X1:A

6XG

RD

EX

2

6 7 8 9 10

SL P

G 8

Tom

o m

ode

X1:A

32

2

2XG

RD

EX

3X1

:A8

K16

K17

Tom

o re

ady

Buck

y re

ady

X1:C

32

102

EXO

N

Uni

vers

al

Inte

rface

Log

ic

I/O in

terfa

ce

I/O

Bidi

rect

iona

l

K14

K15

K16

K17

X1:A

29

X1:C

29

CAN

HC

AN L

CO

D1.

..3

Mne

mon

ics

EN X

/

CTR

L X/

EX C

D

CO

M E

X C

D

EX O

N

W11

CM

EX

SW 1

...4

GN

D 2

IT 0

V

3

2

max

. I

= 1A

XG R

D E

X 4

3 8 10

Buck

y 1(

3)

1

cont

act

4512 983 05571

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

02-0

3-19

Basis rack-2 Z4512 108 0936.

Schr

./Kö

A1/A

3 Backpanel EZ


Z2-5.2(b/02.0)

V53

MN OFPO 0VV45 V46

PO 12V

RESET C/3

4

5

V47V49

3

412

513

614

715

8

Tube extension

5

6

2

41

3

24V74 V70 V71 V72 V73 V77

2

3

5

6

1 2

X3

PO 26V

X18

2

X1711

1

5

PO 26V 1

4

3

V5V4

PO 26V

V3

Operating panel

kV power unit EQ/E2Q

Tube supervision

2

1 4

1

2

X201

2

2

10

X191

9

V7

8

7

6

V6

X12H.V. generator

2513

V86 12

11

820

719

6

5

4

3

18

17

16

15

10

H.V. generator

X11

9

V19

10

V14

X ACT S/

CAN L

CAN H

X71CAN H

STOP X C/

RESET C/X73CTRL X C/X74

15

5

7

13

19 9

14

2

4

6

12 59

V32

I2 2

I2 3

I2 4

E PO CV2

CV2 GND

CV2 GND OLCV2 ID/

TP HT SG

TB CU FR PO

2

V36 V39

HT AN

12

13

14

3

15

4

5

X46

8

7

6

1

2

X14

3

135

124

3

AC 230V L2

1

AC 0V XG

AC 230V L12

X15

V65

14

12

V66

412

5

614

715

NG 15VPO 15V

MN ON

PO 5VCAN H PO 12V

7MN EM OF

8RD MN 0N MN EM OF

R32

switch on circuitEmergency OFF

815

714

6

1)15

14

13

12

8

7

6

11

5

4

103

91

V31 V33

CAN LCAN H

V40

Decade adapter WA/WB

V27 V23

Operating panel

EN X/

RQ SN X/NR PR X/

PO 15V

MN ON

AC 0V XG2

1X13

AC 0V XG

3

4

Operating panel,

X4X47

CAN PO 5V

Power supply

HT CA GNDHT AN GND

TP HT GND

TB CU FR NG

9

10

NG 15V

11

V24V34V28

PO 26V

16

2

AC 230V L1 AC 230V L1

11

210

19

CV2 65 ID/

X45

V35

CTRL X C/

V13 V15

X72

V17

EN X C/

X76

15

13

X52

CAN L

1

X ACT S/

62

RESET C/7

3

STOP X C/8

4

R2

CV2 EN/

V87

RX CAN 2

CAN HCAN L

V89 V91 V92 V93 V94

PO 15VPO 15V

RM DR CT

R1

PO V

V60 V57

X ACT/

CTRL X/

NR PR X/

V59

V55

RESET C/

V58

CAN L

4512 104 910224512 130 5444.

PO 5VCAN H

CAN L

RC ON/

8

7

6

5

2

1

13

2)

I1 4/

E NG CV1

CV1 TMCV1 OL

I2 1/

I2 2/

I2 3/

I2 4/E NG CV2

CV2 TM

CV2 SH

S CAN GND

I1 3/

I1 2/I1 1/

EN X/

PO 0V

RQ SN X/PW ON PO

SI PH/

PO 26V 1 PO 26V 1

kV power unit EQ

PO 26V

TB 2/

TB 2 RT/

TB 3/

TB 3 RT/

V21

21

22

HT CA

23

X351

PO 15V

I1 4

E PO CV1

CV1 ID/

CV1 GND OL

CV1 GNDCV1 EN/

CV1 65 ID/

V78

I2 1

kV power unit E2Q

V76 V75

I1 3

I1 2

I1 1

13

X34

12

14

11

18

17

14

16

15

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

25

1

2

2310

19

20

229

21V18 V22 V20

3

2

X81

11

10RESET C/

9RC RD/

1nF

130R

Termination resistor for X45

V11

V16

X77EN X C/

X75

for OPTIMUS C

To System CAN X432)

To Signal Bus X231)

1)

1)

2)

operating panel CwithFunction programming plug for X44

operating panel C

R/F

RX CAN 1

V62V67 V64

Rotor control 2

V63V61

RD MN ON

TH OL

CM TH

4512 104 9004.

X151

9 PW ON NG/

without

V48

RAD+CD

TH OL SW/

CM TH SW

X44

1

FI TF2 2FI TF1 2

FI TF2 1FI TF1 1

X6X51

2 2

X24

V88V90

MN ON

19

V69

2

11

10

24

S CAN PO

PO V

RESET SW/

4512 983 05511

34

125

136

147

158

11

210

19

Generator CAN termination plug

V12

V56

V54

R4

L2 L3

V10

V50 V51

For survey of the components see Z2-5.4

CAN move to WAX52 / WBX52

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06091


3-1...3-2 (02.0)


1. Hardware programming

1.1. Mains transformer (option)

In case of a present mainstransformer 4512 204 0010x in the generator,connect the primary end according to the ratedvoltage of the mains.Connect 400V mains systems up to the 480Vterminal.

Modify EMC filters EQ200 in the converterassemblies EQ / E2Q if the generator is operatedvia theoptional surgearrester ona groundeddeltamains.See service documentation for surge arrester andconverter R/F.

4512--983--06091

145H94

mains transformer(option)

480V

460V

440V

400V

F1:T1F1:T2F1:T3

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06091

1.2. PCB EZ150 basic interface

NOTENever change jumper W1.

Voltage supply for the amplifiers of connectedmeasuring chambers:

Voltage\Soldering link EZ 150 W2 EZ 150 W3

15V default OFF ON

40V ON OFF

Working voltage range for ALC measuringchambers: 15 ... 45V

Working voltage range for hybrid measuringchambers: 40 ... 45V

ALC measuring chambers can be recognized by thecode No. 4512 104 xxxxx.

Hybrid measuring chambers are based on code No.4512 102/103 xxxxx.

Set thegain factor for AEC techniques with jumperEZ150:W4:

-- Factor 1 ==> W4 in position 3 = defaultFor screen/film combination with at least onesystem speed ≤ 200.

-- Factor 4 ==> W4 in position 1For screen/film combinations with all systemspeeds > 200.

The software programming has to be setaccordingly.

The rest of the generator hardware has beenproperly programmed at the factory.

If required, refer to subsystem manual OPTIMUSRAD section 5: PROGRAMMINGS.

J

195H96

Basic interfaceEZ 150

PCB layout print different from figure.

W1 do not change!

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work


4512--983--06341


4-1...4-4 (02.0)

Setting to work

Contents

1. Setting to work 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06341

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS


4512-983-06341

1. Setting to work

The system is delivered preassembled by the factory.

DWARNINGBefore switching on the X-ray generator:

Switch off the auxiliary mains breaker for table.For detailed information see manual installation of the

OPTIMUS X-ray generator.

Check the power supply for the table on the PCB SN.

DWARNING

Always remove cassette tray before you open the

tabetop. Tilting the tabletop with inserted tray will

cause damages to both table and cassette tray.

DWARNING

Tilting the tabletop beyond the upright positon can

cause damages to the cover of the table base.

For access to the table control unit:

Remove the cassette tray from the bucky.

Move the tabletop to its maximum front position.

Loosen 2 screws at the rear (1).

Tilt the tabletop unit as shown in figure 1.

Secure the tabletop by fixing the lever (2) via thescrew (3).

The table power supply must be 230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

NOTEThere is no programming for 50 or 60 Hz. The tablecan only operate with 230 V (and no with 110 V).

1

2

3

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06341

Follow the setting-to-work procedure described in the manual OPTIMUS X-ray generator .

Programming

Select Registration Devices

-- RGDV1( = registration device for tables 1)

-- RGDV2( = registration device tomo)

-- RGDV3( = registration device wall stand)

-- RGDV4( = registration device free exposure)

After finishing thedescribed setting-to-work procedureof theOPTIMUSX-ray generator, check the functions belowon the table.

After switching on the auxiliary mains breaker for table

Check all functions on the table:

-- Green LED on the power pack is on.

-- The programmed language.

-- Function of foot-switch assembly.

-- Function of the rocker switches “table up/down”on both sides.

-- Function of end-switch upper position:Motor must stop before mechanical end positionis reached.

-- Function of end-switch lower position:Motor must stop before mechanical end positionis reached.

-- Function of safety switch:Apply about 20 kg of manpower against thetabletop during table down movement.

Check the strength of upward table movement.

Check whether the range of movement is 270 mm.

Check the movement of the bucky unit.

Check the functions of the column:

-- Function of catches in all directions.

-- Function of collimator light.

1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06341

Check the functions of the bucky unit:

-- bucky exposure delay

Check delay time of grid release with test exposuretime = 4 ... 6 msec.

There must not be any grid line visible.

NOTEThe X-ray tube was already adjusted at factory.

Do not ADAPT the X-ray tube.

In case the generator was not powered on during alonger period -- e.g. more than 2 months --, werecommend to recondition the X-ray tube. SeeOPTIMUS manual, section Installation, 10.1 Tubeconditioning.

Check coincidence of X-ray beam and light.

-- Make a test exposure.

Check alignment of the stand.

Check alignment of the bucky wall stand.J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06351


4-1...4-11 (02.0)

Z1-2.1 (99.0) A3 4512 983 06141

Adjustment procedure for tomo

Contents

1. Adjustment procedure for tomo 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Adjustment of the table level 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Correction for tomo layer height = fine adjustment under X-ray condition 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Adjustment of tomo layer height indication 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Setting the display language 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Adjustment of the tomo axis 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. Alignment for center line = center of bucky 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7. Checking drive and position control switches 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Tomo adjustment under exposureconditions (tomo only) 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1. Measurement of X-ray zone 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2. Symmetry of tomo axis 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3. Tomography resolution test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4. Tomo layer height 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06351

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06351

1. Adjustment procedure for tomo

1.1. Adjustment of the table level

Check whether the table-top is precisely levelled.Turn on light and laser beam.Adjust laser beam levelling:

- Raise the table to a position somewhat belowmaximum level. The distance from the laserbeam to front and to rear frame of the table-topmust be equal, i.e. the laser beam must beplane-parallel to the table-top.

- If not, turn laser diode slightly with adjustingscrew (1).

Raise table-top precisely to laser beam levelaccording to figure 1. Table-top position must beslightly below the maximum level that can bereached. If not, adjust laser diode height (2).

If not correct:

Open and secure the table-top. Set the upper liftlimit SNV-S7 switch so that the center of the pivotpoint meets the 0-level of the table-top.

1.2. Correction for tomo layer height =fine adjustment under X-ray condition

If a tomo test exposure (with a test phantom) deviatesfrom the tomo height, the correction can be done asfollows:

Solution 1 -- valid for table serial No.≥500If the 0mm layer height = the top of table-top differencesto the0point of the coupling element. The correctioncanbe done on the axis in both directions.

Solution 2 -- valid for table serial No.≤499Correct the tomo layer height = 0mm via the table heightSNVS7 switch = table height for the most upper tableposition. After the SNVS7 correction follow up withsection 1.3. Adjustment of tomo layer height.

Figure 1

AxisCoupling element

+/-- 7 mm

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06351

1.3. Adjustment of tomo layer height indication

Set the service switch (1) on the column controlboard to service. The following message willappear on the control panel display:

Service mode

Diagnosis: 0

Press the <TOMO> key on the control panel (1).This will start the calibration menu. Now follow theinstructions on the display:

Service mode

Move to h=0

Raise the table-top up to laser beam level(corresponding to the minimum objective planelevel 0mm).

Press the <Test> key on the control panel (2). Theposition is now stored in the PLC and the displayshows:

Service mode

Move to h=200

Lower the table-top to 200 mm, use scale meter(corresponding to the maximum objective planelevel 200 mm).Press the <Test> key on the control panel (2). Theposition is now stored in the PLC and the displayshows:

Service mode

Diagnosis: 0

DWARNING

You can always quit the calibration menu without

saving the values by pressing the <TOMO> key

again.

1

Figure 1

T

T

2

1

34

Figure 3

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06351

Leave the service switch on the column controlboard in position service to enter the displaylanguage.

1.4. Setting the display language

The service switch should be in mode service.

Service mode

Diagnosis: 0

Press the <Tomo angle> key on the control panel(3). The following message will appear on thecontrol panel display:

Service mode /V _._

Language: english

( V_._ means Softfware--version )

Press the <Tomo time> key (4) to select anotherlaguage. Repeat until the message appears in thedesired language.Press the <Tomo angle> key on the control panel(3) again to quit the menu.Set the service switch on the column control boardback to operation.

T

T

2

1

34

Figure 4

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06351

1.5. Adjustment of the tomo axis

Prerequisite: Alignment of standard equipment hasbeen completed.Select tomo on control handle.Move column, table-top and bucky tray to thecenter position (the center position is reached if the4 LED-indicators on the control handle are lit).Move transverse arm to normal position.Insert the coupling bar into central and lowerswivels (1, 2).Fit the coupling bar to the column (3). The lockingbolt (4) will be pushed upwards (which will unlockthe ß-movement axis of the transverse arm).

1. Check that the tomo bar activates the tomo sensorswitch UB S15 when inserted.

2. Adjustment of ball bearing to tomo bar:Ball bearings must be engaged in direct contact tothe tomo coupling bar. So no mechanical clearanceis visible.

Bucky device, light beam localiser and coupling barmust be aligned in a vertical plane.If necessary, align the system by adjusting centralswivel (1), lower swivel (2) and position control bar.

2

3

1

4

B

2

3

1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06351

1.6. Alignment for center line= center of bucky

If the center line 3 is not in center of bucky proceed asfollows.

The tomo coupling bar is y centered vertical (4).Open screws (5) on tomo coupling bar androtate/twist the tube support arm.The center line will still be in center of bucky tray(as shown in pos. 3).

1.7. Checking drive and position control switches

For parameter setting and control please refer to theoperating manual.

Procedure:

Move the column carefully from its center positiontowards the left and right end positions and checkthe following items:- the magnetic switch does not touch the positioncams.

- the micro switches S17/S20 are not damaged orsheared off when passing a cam.

- the magnetic switch is triggered at each angleposition cam and the end position cams. Thiscan be checked by observing the red LED on themagnetic switch B1.

Test the safety limit switches: Move the columnmanually to the left and right limit switch positions.The limit switch must be triggered (I/O-LED 35 ontomo controller (PLC) lits) and the system must beswitched off.Initiate a tomo test cycle on the control panel:Select <Tomo> mode with 40°/4s. Press the<Test> key until the cycle is completed and checkthe following items:- the column moves first to the left (1).- the column moves at constant speed and withoutjerks (otherwise check: cable routing, railalignment, dirt on rail surface, spring pressure,driving axle).

5

UBS17

S20

1

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06351

- the eccentric disk operates correctly (otherwisecheck coupling motor (M 3) and position switchUB S16 or both springs are ”fixed too tight”).Therefore, check the distance from screw headto the nut as shown in the figure. The distanceas shown must be 15 ± 0.5 mm.

- the driving wheels grip firmly (otherwise increasespring pressure).

- the column reverses automatically at the endposition on each side.

- the bucky device moves smoothly and withoutjerks (otherwise check alignment of the couplingbar).

- the position control switches (magnetic switchand microswitches) operate correctly, see firststep.

- the position of the coupling bar is vertical aftercompletion of a cycle.

- the distance between control switch B1 and tomoposition cams should be 1 mm.

- If the sequence is aborted, check the function ofthe position control switches (see first step).

- If the sequence is aborted due to timeout (errorcode 30, see subsystem manual buckyDIAGNOST TS, section Fault finding, Chapter”trouble shooting”), increase the motor supplyvoltage by switching to the next highertransformer tap (see schematic diagram Z1-2.1).

Repeat the tomo test cycle with 40 °, 20 ° and 8 °sweeps, with high and low speed settings. Again,check whether any anomalities occur during thetest.

S16

15 ± 0,5 mm

M2

M3

Pivot point

Coupling motor

Tomo motor

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06351

2. Tomo adjustment under exposureconditions (tomo only)

2.1. Measurement of X-ray zone

Two exposures are to be taken on the same film.

First exposure = Bucky

Set the parameters for exposure 1 (without tomo):- Small focus- SID = tomo SID- X-ray area = 200 mm x 200 mm- Exposure values = 40 kV / 6.3 mAs

Second exposure = Tomo

Set the parameters for exposure 2 (with tomo):- Small focus- SID = tomo SID- X-ray area = 150 mm x 200 mm- Tomo height = 130 mm- Exposure values = 40 ˚ / 50 kV / 12.5 mA- Tomo time = 2 s

Take the exposure in tomo mode (tomo on) anddetermine the following values:- a = _____mm- b = _____mm

Check if these values meet the following conditions:- ∆ a, b = ≤ 10 mm- Σ a, b = ≤ 80 mm

If the above conditions are not fullfilled, checkwhether the free movement of the α-drive andbucky module is impaired.If under-voltage is indicated on the generatorcontrol board, the motor will supply voltage byswitching to the next higher transformer tap (seeschematic diagram Z1-2.1).

a b1

2

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06351

2.2. Symmetry of tomo axis

Position the lead plate - 100 mm above the X-Raycassette.

The X-ray cassette ist positioned on the table-top.

Collimate the X-ray field (1) as far as the ”hole” willbe exposed during the whole tomo sweep.Take an exposure in center position (bucky mode)= 70 kV / 10 mAsTake an exposure in tomo mode. 70 kV 2 sec 5mA 40˚.

The result should look like as shown in the figure:

- c ≈ d, i.e. the generator should switch off shortlybefore the system.

- No undervoltage indication should appear on thegenerator.

Check whether these values meet the followingconditions:- |c|-|d| < 5 mm.

If the result is not symmetrical,proceed as follows:- In case of overvoltage lower the tomo speed byselecting a higher resistance with jumpers onboard SZ2 = fine adjustment, i.e. reduce thesupply voltage of the drive or reduce the voltageat transformer T2 side for slow speed = coarseadj. 17.5 V / 15.5 V / 13.5 V ore available. Forhigh speed progr. 31 V / 33 V or 37 V.

- In case of unsymmetry (c < d) increase the tomospeed by selecting a lower resistance withjumpers on board SZ2., i.e raise the supplyvoltage of the drive

¯1

X-ray cassette

100 mm

∅

Lead plate

Table top

dc

3 4

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06351

Programming of symmetry (please fill out the table)- The following programming is selected:

U OnT2

R = OON SZ2

value for c and d in mm:

High speed 37 V O

33 V O

31 V O

................ O

c = .....................mm

d =.......................mm

Low speed 17.5 V O

15.5 V O

13.5 V O

................ O

c = .....................mm

d =.......................mm

Remarks: ⇒ = coarse adj. = fine adj. tested with 40 ° 4 sec and40 ° 2 sec

If necessary, readjust the tomo axis (see Section3.13.4 Adjusting the tomo axis).Repeat the above test.

2.3. Tomography resolution test

Take an exposure with the TOMO test phantomwith following parameter:

TOMO angle TOMO time TOMO height Actual valueResolution lp/mm

40° 4 sec 50 mm

40° 2 sec 50 mm

40° 4 sec 100 mm

40° 2 sec 100 mm

- Minimum resolution = 2.32 lp/mm with smallfocus.

+/-- 5 mm

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06351

2.4. Tomo layer height

(Use TOMO test phantom)

Take the following test exposures with inclinedbucky tray.

Tomo angle Tomo time TOMO layer height --default= nominal value

Measured TOMOlayer height= actual value

Deviation(+/-- 3 mm max.) =nom.--actual value

40 ° 4 seconds 45 mm mm mm



If the deviation is more than +/-- 3mm, pleaserepeate the table calibration procedure as follows:

1) Raise the table height to theeffective (phantom measured)zero-level. In the display you willsee the amount of the deviation.

2) Follow the instruction part 3.13.2Calibration of the level sensor.Note that your table stays on levelzero, do not move the table to zeroas requested in the displayinstruction.

3) Adjust the laser beam.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

bucky DIAGNOST TStomo versionPower supplyA3

99

-11-

23 O

st.


(99.0) Z1-2.1

0VDC

5VDC

X49:2

X49:1

X1:2

X1:1

F146.3A slow

H.V. cable

temperature switch

EG H.V. cable

stator cable, screened

+24VDC

GND

15.5VAC

13.5VAC

0VAC0VAC

X8:8

6.3A slow

34VAC

31VAC

26VAC

28VAC

0VAC

230VAC

230VAC

0VAC

4A slow

X16:3

X16:4

X16:1.1

X16:2.1

EZX3

EX1100

X32:4

X32:3

X31:04

X31:07

X22:04

X22:07

X31:01

X31:12

X22:01

X22:12

+24V

30VAC

0VAC

37VAC

17.5VAC

X20:06

X20:08

+24VX20:01

X20:12

6.3A slow

6.3A slow

ENX2100:L1

ENX2100:N

5A slow

5A slow

X11:12

X8:5

X11:01

X8:4

X8:6

X8:7

L1.1 X11:06

X11:08

X8:2

X8:3

L1

N.1N

X16:1

X16:2

1L1

5N

24VAC

0VAC

+24V

31VAC

15.5VAC

X1:3

X1:4

PLC tomo control

H19

F1

Factory adjusted

F6

H17

H18

H20

XA tube assembly

E generator UE control handleUB stand control

table controlSZ

F2

F5

F12

F11

T2

24VDC/5A

T1

mainsfilter

mains230V~

switchingpower supply

G1

LAhand collimator

SN power supply

centerlaser(optional)

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06361


4-1...4-2 (02.0)

Installation of tomo bar parking frame

Contents

1. Installation of tomo bar parking frame 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06361

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06361

1. Installation of tomo bar parking frame

J

Tomo bar

Wall mounting

65 cm ± 2 cm

10 cm ± 2 cm

Floor

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Setting to work BuckyDiagnost TS


4512--983--06371


4-1...4-2 (04.0)

2Z-10 (03.0) A1/A3 4512 983 06151Annex CCT (03.0) 4512 983 04441


Contents

1. Final work 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Acceptance test 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06371

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TS Setting to work


4512-983-06371

1. Final work

Install all rail covers.

Connect the earth wiring to all covers.

Install all column covers.

Close the X-ray generator cabinet.

Clean all covers with a mild cleaner e.g. soapsuds.

Check the labelling (see drawing 2Z--10).

2. Acceptance test

See national regulations as e.g. Röv / DOD / VA

CCT Test see in annex chapter.

J

11

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

LabellingBuckyDiagnost TSA1

/A3

03-0

9-16

Sch

r.


(03.0) 2Z-10

according to the release status

PHILIPS

type 9848 600 0007.s/n yy.00.nnnbucky table elevation

PHILIPS

LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

MAX. OUTPUT < 1 mWEMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nmFDA CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

C A U T I O NLASER RADIATION

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAMCLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

IEC 825-1: 1993MAX. OUTPUT < 1mW

EMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nm

LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

MAX. OUTPUT < 1 mWEMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nmFDA CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

C A U T I O NLASER RADIATION

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAMCLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

IEC 825-1: 1993MAX. OUTPUT < 1mW

EMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nm

2 3

4a 4b

6d

6c7

8a 9

10

8b, 9, 20

11

5

4a or 4b

4

9, 7, 6c or d

Remove cassette tray andmove tabletop in the front position before tilting the table

11

10

STREUSTRAHLENRASTERGRILLE ANTIOFFUSANTE

Lp/cm

fo(cm)

ratio

X-RAY GRID

K

B

16; 17 (a, b, c, d or e)

18 19

1

15

14

14

1819

or

12a

12b

12a or b

13a 13b

13a or b

5 Kg

or

2 or 3

115

PHILIPS

type 9848 600 0264.s/n yy.00.nnnTS Family PEI

230V 50/60Hz 5A

PHILIPS

Class I - TYPE BIEC 60601-1

5

PHILIPS

type 4512 201 0094.s/n yy.00.nnntube stand fixed arm

PHILIPS

8b

8a

Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany

X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY SRO 33100 ROT 350type 9874 005 16122 150kVs/n xxxxx-xxxxxx

X-RAY TUBE SRO 33100type 9874 206 70102 0,6 IEC 336s/n xxxxxx 1,2 IEC 336

PERMANENT FILTRATION MANUFACTURED 2,5 AL / 75







MANUFACTUREDPERMANENT FILTRATION2,5 AL / 75

X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY RO 1750 ROT 350type 9890 000 85281 s/n xxxxx-xxxxxx

X-RAY TUBE RO 1750type 9800 000 85271s/n xxxxxx

0,6 IEC 3361,2 IEC 336

150 kV

MANUFACTUREDPERMANENT FILTRATION2,5 AL / 75

X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY RO 1648 ROT 350type 9890 000 85301 s/n xxxxx-xxxxxx

X-RAY TUBE RO 1648type 9800 000 85291s/n xxxxxx

0,7 IEC 3361,5 IEC 336

150 kV17a

17b

17c

17d

17e



type 4512 201 0103.s/n yy.00.nnnbucky device left

type 4512 131 17424cassette tray left

type 9848 600 0209.s/n yy.00.nnn

This product complies with the DHHSrequirements of 21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy

USC®

0,3 Al / 75

via Schiapparelli 27 / 33200035 Lissone (Mi) Italy

type 9848 600 0017.s/n yy.00.nnnManufactured: month yyyy

USC®

0,3 Al / 75

via Schiapparelli 27 / 33200035 Lissone (Mi) Italy

PHILIPS

type 9848 600 0006.s/n yy.00.nnnbucky table fix

PHILIPS

PHILIPS

type 9848 600 0023.s/n yy.00.nnntube stand

PHILIPS




PHILIPS

type 9848 600 0008.s/n yy.00.nnnTOMO Equipment

PHILIPS


This product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy


type 9848 600 0208.s/n yy.00.nnncontrol grip tomo/laser TS

type 9848 600 0207.s/n yy.00.nnncontrol grip laser TS

Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/GermanyThis product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy

This product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy

PHILIPSPHILIPS

USC®

Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany

24V 350mA

~

0123

0051 0051

16Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany

PHILIPS

Made in GermanyPHILIPS

® LR37323

C US

type 9890 010 8137.s/n yy.00.nnntabletop 2m

PHILIPSPHILIPSPhilips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraß 24D-22335 Hamburg / GermanyThis product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy

type 9890 010 0219.s/n yy.00.nnntabletop

PHILIPSPHILIPSPhilips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraß 24D-22335 Hamburg / GermanyThis product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441


9-1...9-12 (03.0)

Collimator Compliance Test

Contents

1. Introduction 9--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Test 1: Aligment of BLD Light Field and X-Ray Field (Radiographic) 9--3. . . . .

3. Test 2: X-Ray Field Center Alignment ( Overtable Tube) 9--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Test 3: X-Ray Field Limitation and PBL Operating Range 9--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Workbook Collimator 9--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--04441

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

1. Introduction

NOTEThis test must be done after assembly and after each collimator or X-ray source exchange, to be in compliance

with IEC 60601--1--3 and 21CFR 1020. This test is mandatory for the USA and Canada. If measurements show

values outside of acceptable tolerances (see Workbook 5), check the mechanical adjustments and repeat

measurements. If the stated tolerances are exceeded, then the system is not in complience with IEC

60601--1--3 and FDA regulations and must not be operated.

Test Equipment / Tools

Cassette (18x 24 cm)Cassette (24 x 30 cm)Cassette (35 x 43 cm)Cassette (35 x 35 cm)Ruler, metric / inchMetal washer10 foot measuring tape4 copper strips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

2. Test 1: Aligment of BLD Light Field and X-Ray Field (Radiographic)

NOTEThis test is to determine that the X-ray field size and location is identical to the BLD light field for large and

small focus!

Setup

1. Place the loaded 10 x 12“ (24 x 30 cm) cassette on the table top and center the overtable tube directly at a SIDof 40“ (100 cm).

2. Place empty 8 x 10” (18 x 24 cm) cassette in the bucky unit to enable exposure.

Test

1. Turn on the BLD light.

2. Define the light field perimeter by placingouter edgesof copper strips at the four light field sides (refer tofigure).

3. Placewasher in onequadrant of the film at theanodeend to identify positioning after development.

4. Select large focus andovertable tubeat control deskand expose at 60 kV, 5 mAs.

5. Develop the film.

6. Measure the distances L1, L2, W1 and W2 betweenoutside edges of copper strips and the edges of theX-ray field as shown.

7. Repeat the test for small focus.

film washer

copper strip image (4 x)

L1

W1 W2

L2

Perimeter of the light field 20x20cmcorresponds to the outer edge of thecopper strip

Edge of the X-ray field

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

Result

Record all measurements and file in the workbook. The measurements must comply with the rejection limits.Number and date the films and file them with the workbook.

SID = 40” (100 cm); 2.0 % x 40” (100 cm) = 0.80” (2 cm)

Large focus L1 + L2 = _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID

W1 + W2= _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID

Small focus L1 + L2 = _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID

W1 + W2= _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID

Initials Date

Specification

The total misalignment of the edges of the BLD light field withthe respective edges of the X-ray field along either the widthor length of the light field shall not exceed 2 % of the SID.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

3. Test 2: X-Ray Field Center Alignment ( Overtable Tube)

NOTEThis test must be performed for all tables / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands etc.!

Setup

Equipment completely assembled.

Test

1. Select the tube and image receptor station on thecontrol desk.

2. Center the tube to the image receptor by using theavailable centering aids (the centering stops on theceiling rails, the centering light in the tube controlhandle bar etc.). Set tube at max. SID: 40” (100 cm)for bucky table, up to 72” (180 cm) for buckywallstand.

3. Tape the metal washer in one quadrant of thecassette at the anode end for film orientation.

4. Place the loaded cassette (10 x 12 “) or (24 x 30 cm)in the bucky tray and ensure that it is properlycentered before the tray is inserted into the buckyunit.

5. Manually set the BLD to a slightly smaller size(approx. 9 x 11”) than the cassette size so that theradiated area will be within the limits of the X-ray film.

6. Make an exposure at 60 kV, 5 mAs.

7. Develop the film.

8. On the developed film, locate two points on each ofthe four sides of the exposed field as it is shown in thefigure below.

9. Draw straight lines through two points on each side.Extend the lines until they intersect. The resultingrectangle will be a close approximation of the X-rayfield.

10.Draw diagonals across this field. The crossing pointof the diagonals is the X-ray field center.Also draw diagonals across the X-ray film. Thecrossing point is the X-ray film center.

11.Measure the distance between both centers.This is the displacement (misalignment) of the X-rayfield in relation to the image receptor.

washer

exposed field

film

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

Results

Record the displacement and file in the workbook. Write the test number and date on the film and file it with theworkbook. The test result must be within the rejection limit.

NOTEThis test must be performed for all tables / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands etc.! If

a tube can be used at two different SIDs with the same image receptor, test for both SIDs (tracking).

Measured displacement (mm)Maximum displacement for SID = 100 cm = 20 mmMaximum displacement for SID = 180 cm = 36 mm

bucky table bucky wallstand

_____ mm _____ mm

_____ mm _____ mm

Initials DateInitials Date

Specification

The displacement between the X-ray film center and theX-ray field center must be ≤ 2.0 % SID.SID = 100 cm; maximum displacement = 20 mmSID = 180 cm; maximum displacement = 36 mm.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

4. Test 3: X-Ray Field Limitation and PBL Operating Range

NOTEThis test must be performed for all overtable tube / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands

etc.! Stands that are used at two different SIDs must be tested at both distances.

Setup

Equipment completely assembled.

Test

TABLE BUCKY (Field Limitation Test / IndicatedField Test)

1. Select table bucky auxiliary at the generator controldesk.

2. Set SID to 100 cm. Center the X-ray tube over tablebucky.

3. Rotate the collimator to 45 °.

4. Insert the loaded 18 x 24 cm cassette in the buckytray.

5. Record the indicated field size from collimator dialsbelow.

Length = ________ Width = ________


7. Remove the cassette and put it to a radiation safeplace.

8. Repeat steps 4 and 6 using a loaded 35 x 43 cmcassette.

9. Develop both films.

10.Referring to the figure, measure the actual lengthand width of both films (L1 and W1).Measure the length and width of the exposed area ofboth films (L2 and W2).

Results

Record all measurements and file in the workbook. Verify that the results are within the specifications. Write thetest number and date on the film and file it with the workbook.

film

indicates the exposedarea

45 °

W1

L1

W2L2

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

Test

BUCKY WALLSTAND (Field Limitation Test)

1. Select buckywallstandat thegenerator control desk.

2. Center the X-ray tube to the bucky wallstand and setthe SID to 180 cm (72”).

3. Rotate the collimator to 45 °.

4. Insert the loaded 18 x 24 cm cassette in the buckytray.


6. Remove the cassette and put it to a radiation safeplace.

7. Repeat steps 4 and 6 using a loaded 35 x 43 cmcassette.

8. Develop both films.

9. Referring to the figure ont the next page, measurethe actual length and width of both films (L1 andW1).Measure the length and width of the exposed area ofboth films (L2 and W2).

Results

Record all measurements and file in theworkbook. Verify that the results are within the specifications.Write the testnumber and date on the film and file it with the workbook.

NOTEThis test must be performed for all overtable tube / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands

etc.! Stands that are used at two different SIDs must be tested at both distances.

Specifications

1. The total misalignment of the edges of the X-ray fieldwith the respective edges of the selected portion of theimage receptor along the length or width dimensions ofthe X-ray field in the plane of the image receptor shallnot exceed 3 % of the SID.

2. The sum, without regard to the sign, of the above lengthand width misalignments shall not exceed 4 % of the SID.

3. The indicated field size and actual field size must be within2 % of the maximum SID.

4. For BLDs with PBL and manufactured after November 30,1983:Positive Beam Limiting must be operational when:a X-ray beam is within¦ 3 % of vertical and

SID is 90 cm to 130 cm, inclusive..b X-ray beam is within¦ 3 % of horizontal and

SID is 90 cm to 205 cm, inclusive..

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

BUCKY TABLE:

Indicated Field Size(Value read off of the collimator)

18 x 24 cm cassette 35 x 43 cm cassette

Indicated Width

Indicated Length

18 x 24 cm cassette bucky table

Film(Actual Length and Width)

Exposed Difference Specification100 cm SID

L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 3 cm

W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 3 cm

Total difference =(sum of above)

____________ cm≤ 4 cm

Indicated Exposed Difference Specificaton100 cm SID

(L step 5)__________ cm (L2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm

(W step 5)__________ cm (W2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

BUCKY TABLE (continued):

35 x 43 cm cassette bucky table



L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 3 cm

W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 3 cm


____________ cm≤ 4 cm

Indicated Exposed Difference Specificaton100 cm SID

(L step 5)__________ cm (L2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm

(W step 5)__________ cm (W2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm

Initials Date

Verify with a check (X) (not for manual collimator)

X-ray beam direktion within 3 % of vertical

PBL operational from 90...130 cm SID

Initials Date

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

BUCKY WALLSTAND (BWS):

18 x 35 cm cassette bucky wallstand



L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 5.4cm

W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 5.4 cm


____________ cm≤ 7.2 cm

35 x 43 cm cassette bucky wallstand



L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 5.4cm

W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 5.4 cm


____________ cm≤ 7.2 cm


Verify with a check (X) (not for manual collimator)

X-ray beam direktion within 3 % of vertical

PBL operational from 90...205 cm SID


Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--04441

5. Workbook Collimator

General

Customer:Customers address:Equipment address:Distributor:Installation date:Report date:Name of service engineer:Signature of the service engineer:

Equipment

Component Description Type Number Serial Number

Collimator j GALILEO 9896 010 0061_

j NICOL 9896 010 2200_

j Manual Collimator 9890 010 804_ _

Bucky table

Bucky wallstand

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Setting to work OPTIMUS 30 single phase


4512--983--06381


4-1...4-2 (02.0)

Switch On the System

Contents

1. Switch ON the System 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Ready 1 / ready 2 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Check the following LEDs 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06381

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS 30 single phase Setting to work


4512-983-06381

1. Switch ON the System

1.1. Ready 1 / ready 2

Switch the system ON.

The self test procedure of the control desk will gowhile

Service Mode Self Test = 30 seconds.

Normal Mode = 45 seconds.

NoteControl Desk

Ready condition will be not displayed= no green light for ready 1

After prep = anode is accelerated, the ready 2 willbe displayed

2. Check the following LEDs

LEDs are displaying the ready condition:

PCB LED Colour Function3A1 HT Controller DS1 gn Slows to steady flash 1Hz

3A3 Filiament circuit DS1 / DS2 gn Both LEDs are ON

3A2 Interface circuit DS1 gn Generator Power ON

1A ATP Console DS1 red WatchdogLED = ON, Correct timing

with generatorDS2 red Flash 1Hz while communication

Module6 6NL1Power lamp gn

Power lamp is ONfor supply ONPMA is present

J

HOPTIMUS

RDY2

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512--983--06391


4-1...4-2 (02.0)

Tube Adjustment

Contents

1. Tube adjustment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Tube conditioning 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06391

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



4512-983-06391

1. Tube adjustment

DWARNINGRadiation is released during the tube conditioning.

1.1. Tube conditioning

This procedure must be performed for each new installed tube. Specially if the storage time between factory andfield exceed 4 weeks. The interval times between exposures must be adhered to andmonitored with a watch. Thebreak-in of the tube only takes place on large focus.

S RGDV 4 / Free exposure

S Select large focus.

S Release exposures according to the following table.

The exposure run must always bemade at one kV level without any repeated start-up of the tube, i.e. the PREPbutton must always remain pressed during the run.

Number of EXPs kV mAs Pause [s]5 81 125 1

303 102 125 1

302 109 125 1

602 125 125 1

120

In the event of electrical interference the process must be continued after an interval of 5 minutes, starting atthe lower kV level.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips


(04.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06401


4--1...4--2 (04.0)

2Z--10 (04.0) A3 4512 983 06201


Contents

1. APR Programmings 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. AEC and Adjustment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Acceptance Test 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Final Work and Handing Over 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06401

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06401

1. APR Programmings

See manual of APR.

2. AEC and Adjustment

See manual of AEC

See manual of Adjustment

3. Acceptance Test

See manual of National Regulation

4. Final Work and Handing Over

Fit all covers to:

-- PMA 800

-- Generator

-- bucky DIAGNOST TS

-- bucky DIAGNOST VE (if established)

-- control desk

Clean covers.

Check the labeling (see drawing 2Z--10).

Hand over the system to the customer.

File in the documentation at side.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

LabellingOPTIMUS 30 Single phaseA3

04-

01-1

4 Sc

hr.


(04.0) 2Z-10

X-RAY CONTROLX-RAY GENERATOR

INTERNA labellingon generator cabinet

CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Controlfor Health and Safety Act of 1968, applicable atdate of manufacture. Manufactured: June 2001


SEDECALMade by

X-RAY CONTROLtype 4512 201 0081.s/n C _ _ _ _ _Family PEI 9890 010 8259.

PHILIPSPHILIPS

X11

X3X1

THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUSTO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.

WARNING:

- MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT -WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC SHOCK

FIRE, AND MECHANICAL HAZARDSONLY IN ACCORDANCE

WITH UL 60601-1,CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1

<8D20>

PHILIPS

IEC 60601-2-32:1994Associated equipment

CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Controlfor Health and Safety Act of 1968, applicable atdate of manufacture. Manufactured: June 2001

USC

DEIFISSACL

R

Class I - TYPE B IEC 60601-1

PHILIPS

X-RAY GENERATORtype 9890 010 81981s/n G _ _ _ _ _Family PEI 9890 010 82591


230V ~ 50/60Hz 140A

Made by

SEDECAL

view fromrear side

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS Setting-to-work


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06001


4-1 (02.0)

Switch-ON

1. Switch-ON of the generatorSwitch ON the fuses present at the clinic.

Switch ON automatic circuit-breakers ENF1, ENF2 and ENF3.

The yellow LED on EN100 power ON circuit must be illuminated.

J

4512--983--06001

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06101


4-1...4-5 (02.0)

Software XRGSCOPE

1. Installation software XRGSCOPE

1.1. PC and generator settings to avoid problems during up/downloading of CUcomplete files

Optimus RAD release 2.x and 3.x CMOS data are up/downloaded in one string without handshake.

Any kind of interruption can cause the loading process to fail.

Problems occur mainly during the download to the PC.

A download file which is not complete cannot be used as a safety backup file.

1.1.1. Preparation of the service PC to guarantee a safe loading process

Start XRGSCOPE always from DOS if possible.

When using any WINDOWS version:

Switch OFF all screensavers.

Do not run other programs.

Do not insert any CD in the drive.

Any kind of power management of the PC hardware (BIOS) as well as the windows power management shouldbe switched OFF.If connected to mains power some of these might be automatically OFF.

1.1.2. Preparation of the generator

Preparation of generators without a CAN interface:

Switch ON the generator.The loading process can be started once relay ENK1 has been energized.

4512--983--06101

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06101

Preparation of generators which are connected via a CAN interface:

-- BuckyDiagnost TH and TH2

-- DigitalDiagnost

-- Thoravision

Disconnect the following plugs:

System Connector

EZX23

signal bus





Thoravision X X X

Switch ON the generator.

NOTEThe download procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes after

the generator has been switched ON.

NOTEIn case of mailing CU complete download files or any other xxx.TDL files use a zipped file format.

These files are ASCII files which might be destroyed while being mailed.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06101

1.2. Installation procedure

Provide the service PC with the hardware key and switch it ON.The hardware key provides access to special program settings and to menu ”Faultfind”.Standard programming is possible without a hardware key.

Connect the PC to X5 on EZ139 CENTRAL UNIT CU via a serial data cable:(A 5m long data cable can be ordered via 12NC: 4512 130 56931)

Insert the floppy disks containing the self-unpacking exe-files of the firmware in the disk drive of the PC:-- OMA : 4512 116 022xx-- OMB : 4512 116 023xxFor unpacking on the harddisk of the PC about 5MB are needed.

Generate a directory e.g. [C:\OPT_R_35] on the PC by typing <md C:\OPT_R_35> or use WIN commands.

Copy the firmware from both floppy disks to the PC into the same directory C:\OPT_R_35 by typing<copy A:\*.* C:\OPT_R_35> or use WIN commands.

Start unpacking the programs by typing <OMAxxxxx.exe> and <OMBxxxxx.exe> or doubleclick on<*.exe> -files.The programs unpack all files needed for the update of the firmware and the newest service tools.

After unpacking [OMAxxxxx.exe] and [OMBxxxxx.exe] can be deleted on the harddisk by typing<del OMAxxxxx.exe> and <del OMBxxxxx.exe>.

For the current contents [of OMA/OMBxxxxx.exe] read [OMA/OMBxxxxx.txt] on the floppy disks.

For a new installation of the generator firmware see subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAD section 4REPLACEMENT, chapter 4”Exchange of firmware ...”.

Call the installation program by typing <xrgscope> or <xrgscope lcd> for PCs with LCD screen.

1 206

2 *

PC: COM1 Generator: EZ139X5

48

(9-pole, female) (25-pole, female)

* 23 ** 36

7* 5

8

7 *54

* = sufficient for communication RAD / RF

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06101

Start with a XRGSCOPE-screen CUSTOMER.tdl with data which are actually stored in CUSTOMER.tdl. Type“XRGSCOPE customer”Whenever data screens like ’error log index’ are saved to a xxx.TDL file (function save <F3> appears in thebottom line), ‘customer data’ being saved in the CUSTOMER.tdl file are attached to the saved data screen. Ithelps to separate saved screen files of different sites, customers or rooms in the same hospital.Site data must be stored in CUSTOMER.tdl file, only data of this file are attached to the saved screens. Onecan save site specific customer data in self-made files using <F3>. To recall site data use the load <F4> function.

Procedure:Either theCUSTOMER.tdl screen is open or open the ‘Customer Data’ screen. Push <F4> and select a site datafile. The old data screen comes up. Now save this screen with <F3> typing in CUSTOMER as file name.

-- Customer Name:

-- City / State:

-- Country:

-- Generator Location:

-- Generator Serial Number:

-- Generator 12 NC:

-- Memo1:

-- Memo2:

-- Memo3:

After <ESC> the following menu line appears:

File OPTIMUS Select Unit Options Help

Select ”OPTIMUS”.

The following menu line appears:

Program Adjust Accept Faultfind Quit

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06101

General information:

-- Button <F1> <help> Call help / cancel help.

-- Button <F2> <transmit> Store screen contents / data set in the generator ==> transmit to generator.

-- Button <F3> <save> Store data screen on disk.For an open data screen the path desired can be selected.

-- Button <F4> <load> Load data set from disk.The desired path can be selected.

-- Button <ESC> Commands one step back. Can be used repeatedly.

-- Fields with ↓ Select the possible range of values by pushing <RETURN>.The data are specified by the generator as fixed values.

-- Fields with [...] Input of data via the keyboard.

Error numbers which appear at the beginning of the programming procedure must be erased from the screenby pushing the <RETURN> key.

Current data files, for instance, for online help, tube types, APR programmingare available in thePHILIPS-Intranet.Use path: http://technet.best.ms.philips.com/ and pull down menu as shown below.

If the installation program is called with <xrgscope ?> the possible starting parameters for the service programare listed.

J

412H01

http://technet.best.ms.philips.com/

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

XRAY GENERATORS . . .. . .. . .

DOWNLOAD

PMS TechNet

PHILIPS Insight Medical Systems

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111


4-1...4-13 (02.0)

Z1--1.2 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05751 2Z--2.5 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05641Z1--15.1 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05571 2Z--2.6 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056512Z--2.0 01.0) A4 4512 983 05591 2Z--2.8 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056712Z--2.2 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05611 2Z--2.9 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056812Z--2.4 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05631 2Z--2.10 (01.0) A4 4512 983 05691


Contents

1. Setting-to-work overview 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Configuration 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.1. Date and time 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.2. Mains data 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3. Tubes 4--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.1. Tube data set 4--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.2. Tube speed selection 4--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.3. Tube limits 4--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.4. Capacitance of tube connection 4--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.5. Tube operating modes 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.6. Disable tube 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Registration devices 4--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1. Data set A ... B 4--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.2. Interface assignment 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.3. Examples for RGDV programming 4--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06111

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1. Setting-to-work overview

NOTEThe programming of a generator must take place in the sequence specified below.

As long as no tube or RGDV has been assigned there is no display at all on the desk except “PHILIPS OPTIMUS”.

1.1. Configuration

1.2. Registration devices

RESET the generator

1.3. Tube adjustment

RESET the generator

1.4. Dose rate control

RESET the generator

1.5. Application limits

RESET the generator

1.6. Human interface

RESET the generator

1.7. Option: Tomo Density Control TDC

1.8. Option: VARIOFOCUS

1.9. Option: Area Dose Calculator

1.10. Acceptance test

1.11. Interlock facility for APR modification

1.12. Backup of all configuration data

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.1. Configuration

Switch the generator ON.

1.1.1. Date and time

S Select menu:PROGRAM/ DATE AND TIME

S Enter the respective local data.

1.1.2. Mains data

S Select menu:PROGRAM/ MAINS DATA

S Select the nominal value of the mains voltage U.Range: 380V, 400V, 440V, 480VDefault: 400VIf 460V is present program 480V.If 415V is present program 400V.

S Enter the maximum internal mains resistance Ri.Range: 0 ... 500mΩ

Depending on the internal mains resistance and the mains voltage the generator calculates the maximum possibleoutput.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.1.3. Tubes

NOTEGenerators which are connected by a CAN interface have to be prepared as described below.

Preparation for:


-- DigitalDiagnost

-- Thoravision


System Connector

EZX23

signal bus





Thoravision X X X


NOTEThe download procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes after

the generator has been switched ON.

Do not care if the generator is not programmed yet.

1.1.3.1. Tube data set

Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/TUBE 1 ... 3/ TUBE 1 ... 3 DATA SET

Start the displayed file TUBExxx.tdl with <RETURN>.All the permitted combinations of tube type and housing type are listed in a window.

Select the respective combination of tube type and housing type from the list and push <RETURN>.

RESET the generator.Then the data which have been configured up to now are read by the processor when the system is started.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.1.3.2. Tube speed selection

Depending on the type of tube loaded the anode speed is automatically programmed.

Modifications, if necessary, may only be performed if a hardkey is used on the PC.

CAUTIONWrong programming can cause tube problems.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/TUBE 1 ... 3/ TUBE 1 ... 3 SPEED SELECTION

RPM \ tube type RO SRO

Exposure rotation [RPM] 3000 9000

Fast exposure rotation [RPM] n/a n/a

1.1.3.3. Tube limits

Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE LIMITS

Program the maximum working voltage which is indicated on the data label:

Max. tube voltage limitRange: 40 ... 150kVDefault: 150kV

Adaptation of the tube takes place only up to this limit.

NOTEIf older tubes are to be operated on this generator, it is urgently recommended that the max. kV used in

practical operation so far be specified instead of the theoretically possible value.

The max. kV value should be determined during the conditioning procedure as described in chapter 1.3.1

(modul Configuration part 2).

After adaptation of a tube the upper kV limit is displayed for each focus of each tube under:Adapted to [kV]: e.g. 125kV

All the other limit programmings are performed by the generator automatically and do not usually have to beobserved.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.1.3.4. Capacitance of tube connection

Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ CAPACITANCE TUBE CONNECTOR

Range: 2.000 ... 10.000nF

The total capacitance for each tube connected is indicated:

C = ½ (CH.V. generator + CH.V. cable)

= 4.550nF Default for H.V. generator + 20m H.V. cable (155pF/m)

Cc x L Cc = specific cable capacitance in [pF/m]C [nF] = 3 + ---------------- L = single cable length in [m]

2000

Single length [m]Capacitance tube connection [nF]

Single length [m]For 155pF/m cable For 200pF/m cable

14 4.085 4.400

16 4.240 4.600

18 4.395 4.800

20 4.550 5.000

22 4.705 5.200

24 4.860 --

26 5.015 --

28 5.170 --

30 5.325 --

The high-voltage cables type 9806 402 6xx02 currently being supplied have a capacitance of 155pF/m.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.1.3.5. Tube operating modes

Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE OPERATING MODE

-- Intermediate boost:

Select ... Disable = During preparation the rated filament current is applied (default).

Enable = During preparation a reduced filament current is applied.After the release of exposure boosting takes place for a short time before theexposure is released. Effective with tube currents > 80% of max. value.

-- Rotation prolongation after PREP:

Select ... Disable = The tube is braked as soon as preparation has been cancelled.

Enable = After cancellation of preparation the tube is only braked after 30s. Within thistime preparation can be repeated as often as necessary.Recommended for paediatrics and casualty rooms.The enable mode works with high speed rotor control unit only.

1.1.3.6. Disable tube

For correction of the configuration.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ DISABLE TUBE

When the tube is disabled the above stored data set of the tube is erased. To enable the tube the data set has tobe loaded again.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.2. Registration devices

1.2.1. Data set A ... B

Select menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ DATA SET A ... B

Program the data set A and B of RGDV 1 ... 8 for all exam. / aux. units desired.

NoteProgrammings written on a grey background and marked by a “*” have to be done butdo not affect the functions of this generatorRAD type. (Theyaremade for generatorsR/Fversion).

Data set A

Room: Room number of the exam. / aux. unit for room decade(radiation warning display and door contact).

Tube: Tube assignment for the exam. / aux. unit.

Release circuit number: Number of the release decade of the release circuit adaptation unitWA (e.g.: 1 for X1 etc., see Z1-1.2).

Enable handswitch at generatordesk: Programming Enable release switch

at generator deskEnable externalrelease switch 1)

NO X

YES X

X X

Syncmaster present: NO = Free cassette (without cassette present interlock)

YES = -- Bucky or tomo synchronous contact 2)-- WA 4:1--2 (20/21)

Exposure switch type: Single step = Exposure request instantly with preparation 1)

Double step = Individual preparation request and exposure request

Bucky format density correction: Density correction in steps of 6%. Range: --8 ... +8Correction during collimation, input at WAX11/12 pin 1-2, side fieldsactive when contact closed (<24x24cm), center field only whenopened.With GALILEO or NICOL collimator via Bucky controller with CAN.

* Cone density correction: no function

Dose measurement input: Measuring chamber respectively at input EZX 21, 22, 31, 32, 41

none = No measuring chamber assigned.For free cassette or tomography without TDC.

1) For this function the WA option is required.Ignore for RGDV with CAN: BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Thoravision, DigitalDiagnost.

2) All RGDV with CAN: BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Thoravision, DigitalDiagnost.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

Data set A continued:

Dose measurement sensor type:

Bucky AMPLIMAT: Input viaEZX21/22/31/32/41,measuring field selection on control desk possible.

* Scopo amplimat: no function

Photo sensor / AMPLIMAT input: Photo sensor input via EZX21/22/31/32/41.

Exposure series /Tomo movement: NO = Instant brake after exposure end.

NO = To be programmed for tomo systems via system CAN.BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, DigitalDiagnost,

YES = More than one exposure possible with one PREP.For tomo units released by 1WA/2WA, PREP must be keptactive at the release decade to get the tomo stand back tothe start position.

Release delay (automatic techniques): enable = Must be enabled for all AEC techniques.Automatically disabled if non AEC techniquesselected.

disable = Not to be programmed.Keep release delay always on enable.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

Data set A continued:

Mounted radiographical controller:

none = Must be programmed if any release circuit adaptationunit 1WA, 2WA is assigned to this RGDV.No CAN controlled system is assigned to this RGDV.

Bucky controller 1 / DigitalDiagnost = CAN controlled system-- BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, DigitalDiagnostRGDV1 ... 4 only

Bucky controller 2 = No function yet.

Thoravision = Can controlled system-- ThoravisionRGDV1 only

Release circuit adaptation unit: Assignment of the release unit 1WA, 2WAnone = free cassette or in case of a CAN driven examination unit

Mounted tomo extension: none = no tomo unit installed1WA = (1)WAX21 valid as tomography time input2WA = 2WAX21 valid as tomography time input

* Medium II format kV corr. (dose equiv. steps): Range = 0...8 dose equiv. + kV correction steps* Medium II format density corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% density steps* Medium II format mAs corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% mAs steps* Small II format kV corr. (dose equiv. steps): Range = 0...8 dose equiv. kV reduction steps* Small II format density corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% density steps* Small II format mAs corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% mAs steps

An RGDV must not be assigned to a ”mounted radiographical controller” and a ”release circuit adaptation unit”together.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

Data Set B (underlined items = default)

Used for tomo: NOYES = With YES a definition of the tomography time is expected from

the examination unit, e.g. via WAX21 or from a Buckycontroller with tomo.

* Used for fluoroscopy: NO = OkYES = Fluoro unit

* CT add on: NO = Ok (No function available yet)

Disable time override: NOYES = Disables time override function at desk.

Automatically disabled with ”Used for tomo = YES”.

Tube power factor: 1 ... 100%

kV steps: Single = kV-grading in steps of 1kVDose equivalent = 6% kV steps≙ 25% density steps

mA steps: step width in 25, 12 or 6%

Time steps: exposure time step width in 25, 12 or 6%

Density steps: step width in 25, 12 or 6%

Density correction (6% steps): --8 ... 0 ... +8 correction stepsFor correction see chapter 13.

Underexposure display(non-automatic techniques): YES = Underexposure is also indicated with techniques without

AMPLIMAT.YES = To be programmed for tomo systems via system CAN:

BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, DigitalDiagnost.NO = Must be set for all non-CAN tomo systems.

Tube overload protection: ON = Overload protection active (default): red = no PREP possibleOFF = Exposures are possible irrespective of load status.

Must not be programmed.

desk display tube load

green 100%

green -- yellow 100%

yellow 80%

yellow -- red 64%

red 0%

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.2.2. Interface assignment

Select menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV INTERFACE ASSIGNMENT/ BUCKY/TOMO 1WA...2WA

NOTEThere must be no programming here if the diagnostic unit is connected via the CAN interface:

BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Thoravision, DigitalDiagnost.

Assign the format and ready contacts of the decade connector WAX11 or WAX12 to a Bucky or tomographyRGDV. Refer to Z1-15.1.

-- Decade Bucky 1 (X11) See following table.

-- Decade Bucky 2 (X12) Program the functions as for the first Bucky decade.

-- Tomo Time 0.1 ... 6000ms for each trajectory.

One tomography unit can be programmed for each device interface.

Decade Bucky 1 ... 2

Tomo mode switch: disable = Input ”tomo mode” is not activated. Remote changeoverBucky / tomography not possible via the examination unit.

enable = Input ”tomo mode” is activated.Remote changeover Bucky / tomography possible.Bucky and tomo RGDV must be defined.

Bucky RGDV -- switch related: none/ RGDV 1 ... 8

The inputs ”format contacts” and ”Bucky ready” are activated.

When the tomo mode switch is enabled, this RGDV is activated when theremote tomo mode switch is open.

Bucky RGDV: none/RGDV 1 ... 8

The inputs ”format contacts” and ”Bucky ready” can be assigned to anyRGDV button.The inputs ”format contacts” and ”tomo ready” are activated.

Tomo RGDV -- switch related: none/ RGDV 1 ... 8

When the tomo mode switch is enabled, this RGDV is activated when theremote tomo mode switch is closed.

S RESET the generator.

S Fill in the program settings in table “RGDV programming” 2Z--2.0 at the end of this modul.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06111

1.2.3. Examples for RGDV programming

Example No. System Refer drawing

1 -- BuckyDiagnost TH with Bucky controller-- Diagnost 76: Exposure Scopo / BV-DSI 2Z--2.2

2-- HDH with / without tomo time input-- Bucky wall stand-- Free cassette

2Z--2.4

3

-- BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Digital Diagnost with Bucky controller andCAN interface

-- Bucky wall stand-- Free cassette

2Z--2.5

4-- BuckyDiagnost TS-- Bucky wall stand-- Free cassette

2Z--2.6

5-- Bucky TH any version with Bucky controller-- Generator equipped with or without decade adaptation unit WA-- Auxiliary for MCS (only) = RGDV4 in combination with free cassette

2Z--2.8

6-- Bucky TH any version-- Generator equipped with or without decade adaptation unit WA-- Auxiliary for MCS (only) = RGDV5 ... 8

2Z--2.9

7

-- Bucky TH any version-- Generator equipped with or without decade adaptation unit WA-- Auxiliary for Trauma Diagnost (only) = RGDV5 ... 8-- Auxiliaries RGDV1 ... 4 must not be used with a Bucky TH system viaCAN

2Z--2.10

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

X51

X4

Rel

ease

4

X2


Rel

ease

3

X1

Rel

ease

2

Rel

ease

1

X24X23

PTC

X22X21

Exte

rnal

APR

T

EXO

N

Tom

o tim

es

Tom

o tra

ject

orie

s

X4X3X2

Rel

ease

4


X52

PTC

X24X23X22X21

102Universal

I/O interface

Buck

y 2

X11

EXO

N

X12 X13

Tom

o tim

es

X14

Tom

o tra

ject

orie

s

Exte

rnal

APR

T

Buck

y 2

X11 X3

Buck

y 1

Option rack

CAN/XS-Bus

102Universal

I/O interface

or

WA

X52

for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable

CAN/XS-Bus

2 WA

W

Function unit ADAP bFunction unit ADAP a

X14X13

Buck

y 1

X12

Rel

ease

3

Rel

ease

2

Rel

ease

1

X1

EZX19

CAN/XS-Bus

Block diagramExpansions

Z1-1.2

Schr

./Kö

02-0

3-19

A1/A

3

4512 983 05751c Philips Medical Systems

(97.0)

Termination resistor

EZX45CAN/XS-BusX51 X52

EZX45or1WA X52

15 pin

2WA X52whoever is thelast in line

X42

Adaptor decade cable

26VDCX41

for 4 aux. units

X4226VDCEZX19

X41X42

1 WA for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable

102Universal

I/O interface

Function unit ADAP _a

Tom

o tim

es

X21

EXO

N

X14

Tom

o tra

ject

orie

s

X22X13

Exte

rnal

APR

T

X23


Buck

y 2

X12

PTC

X24

Buck

y 1

X11

Rel

ease

4

X4R

elea

se 3

X3

Rel

ease

2

X2

Rel

ease

1

X1

X51

EZX45

26VDCX41

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

X1:C

27SL

TO

TM

8

X1:A

27SL

TO

TM

7

X1:C

26SL

TO

TM

6

X1:A

26

X1:C

25

SL T

O T

M 5

X1:A

25

SL T

O T

M 4

10tra

ject

orie

s


Z1-15.1

X2:A

9

X2:C

9

CO

M E

X C

D

X1:A

24

X1:C

24

EX C

D

IT 0

V

SL T

O T

M 1

SL T

O T

M 2

SL T

O T

M 3

K18

10R

EX O

N

X1:C

19

X1:A

12

X1:C

12

SW B

U 1

SW B

U 2

4 5 8

10

9

8 9

X1:A

21

X14

1 2 3

X13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

X AC

T/

EX C

D

t

500.

..600

ms

RQ

PQ

/

EXO

N

t

X1:A

10

4

3

4

X1:A

4

4

X1:C

6

3 4

X1:C

8

PO 2

6V R

E

X1:C

10

X1:A

C1

6 7 10

X1:C

205 6 7 82 3 4

codi

ng

gene

rato

r CAN

hig

h ac

tive

gene

rato

r CAN

low

act

ive

Expa

nsio

ns

GN

D S

or P

O 0

V

NR

PR

X/

PO 2

6V

expo

sure

end

grou

nd

com

mon

for e

xpos

ure

end

expo

sure

on

PO 2

6V R

E

RES

ET C

/

sign

al b

us e

nabl

e X-

ray

RQ

PR

/R

G D

V 1.

..4

sign

al b

us X

-ray

requ

est c

omm

and

RQ

PR

HS

sign

al b

us g

roun

d

+26V

sup

ply

emitt

er 0

V ex

posu

re o

n si

gnal

+26V

sup

ply

reve

rse

not r

eady

pre

parin

g fo

r X-ra

y

regi

stra

tion

devi

cesy

stem

RES

ET c

omm

and

requ

est p

repa

ratio

n

SW T

O 1

SW S

F C

F 2

SW T

O 2

TOM

O P

GTO

PG

1...

8TO

PG

SL

(SW

pro

gram

mab

le in

Dat

a Se

t A)

requ

est p

repa

ratio

n fro

m h

ands

witc

h

X AC

T/

V15

S or

PO

V

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

exp

osur

e

switc

h bu

cky

2

XG R

D E

X 1.

..4

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

fluo

rosc

opy

switc

h to

mog

raph

y 1

tom

o pr

ogra

m

switc

h to

mog

raph

y 2

sele

ct X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

tom

ogra

phy

tom

o m

ode

prog

ram

med

tom

o pr

ogra

m s

elec

ted

sign

al b

us +

15V

supp

ly

sign

al b

us X

-ray

activ

e

switc

h si

de fi

eld

to c

entra

l fie

ld b

ucky

mea

surin

g ch

ambe

r 1sw

itch

side

fiel

d to

cen

tral f

ield

buc

ky m

easu

ring

cham

ber 2

X-ra

y ge

nera

tor r

eady

for e

xpos

ure

requ

est

10

X1:A

13

X2:A

25R

Q S

N X

/

K13

PO 2

6V

RQ

XG

PR

1

RQ

XG

PR

2

RQ

XG

PR

3

RQ

XG

PR

4

X41:

1 PO 2

6V

CTR

L X/

RD

PR

X

X2:C

25

EN X

/N

R P

R X

/X2

:C26

W1

Selft

est

Star

t

Rea

dy

Erro

r

CAN

- an

noun

cem

ent

+m

ax.:

26V

1

10m

A

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Tom

o

X22

Tom

o tim

es

35

Form

at

6 7

(97.0)

8 9 10

X1:C

31

ADAP

_ b

ADAP

_ a

ADAP

_ a

===

2WA

1WA

WA

Func

tion

unit


Rel

ease

con

trol

(gal

vani

c de

coup

led)

1

2X23

4 5 6 7 8 9

SLPG

1

SLPG

2

SLPG

3

SLPG

4

SLPG

5

SLPG

6

6 7

Schr

./Kö

A1/A

3

Rel

ease

1(5

)

X2R

elea

se 2

(6)

c

Rel

ease

3(7

)

X3

)

Rel

ease

4(8

)

from

451

2 10

8 08

043

onw

ards

:- K

1 in

XG

RD

EX c

ircui

t

- sig

nal E

X C

D a

dded

K1V9

max

. 26V

,5A

1 3 10

+

+26V

GN

D2

RQ

PR

HS

RQ

XG

PR

02-0

3-19

X1 1

- V9

: max

. I in

crea

sed

from

1A

to 5

A

X1:A

3

+5V

8 9

K1

K14

K15

X1:C

4

Rel

ease

1...

4

K16

X1:A

7

RG

DV

1

K17

X1:A

9

X1:A

11

X1:A

5

5

8 9

X2:A

C14

V15

SPO

V

DC

GN

D S

X2:A

C15

PO 0

V

DC

CAN

H

CAN

L

RES

ET C

/

X2:A

C27

CO

D 1

CO

D 2

CO

D 3

+15V

X2:C

3

X2:A

3

X2:A

6

X2:A

21

X2:C

21

X2:A

22

Buck

y 2(

4)

X12

open

ed:

X11

1

2 3 4

SW S

F C

F 1

SW S

F C

F 2

Test

PR

EP

S2

Test

FLU

OR

O

S1

X1:A

30

X1:C

30

X21

TO P

G 1

TO P

G 2

TO P

G 3

TO P

G 4

TO P

G 5

TO P

G 6

TO P

G 7

X1:C

13

X1:A

14

X1:C

14

X1:A

15

X1:C

15

X1:A

16

SL P

G 7

X1:C

16

X1:A

17

X1:C

17

X41:

2

X52

W2

W1

W2

W3

requ

est s

ynch

roni

zatio

nR

Q S

N X

/R

Q X

G E

XR

Q X

G F

LR

Q X

G P

R1.

..4

inte

rface

K5 K4 K7 K6

PO 2

6VX AC

T/ W12

W13

GN

D 2

X42:

2

7

RG

DVS

L(n)

RG

DVS

L(m

)

WA

or 1

WA

2WA

I/O

Bidi

rect

iona

l

inte

rface

stat

us

X1:A

28

X1:C

28

X1:A

31

H1

K9

X1:A

18

X1:A

20

X1:C

18

X1:A

19

SL X

G T

O

SW T

O 1

SW T

O 2

9

EXO

N

1010

CM

EX

SW 1

clos

ed:

CM

EX

SW 2

CM

EX

SW 3

CM

EX

SW 4

X1:C

11

TO P

G 1

...8

K12

TO P

G S

L

RG

DV

2

RG

DV

35

RG

DV

45

RQ

XG

FL

6

GN

D 2

6 7

6 7 9

8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5PTC

X24

SL P

G 1

TOM

O P

G

SL P

G 2

SL P

G 3

TO P

G S

L

SL P

G 4

SL P

G 5

SL P

G 6

PO 2

6V

PO 2

6V

SL C

O 1

SL C

O 2

WA

1WA X5

1X4 1

1R

Q X

G E

X1

TO P

G 8

Exte

rnal

APR

T

K3

C75

I/O brai

n

X2:A

C28

2

Tom

o

X1:A

C2

X1:C

5

X1:C

7

X1:C

9

K14.

..K17

K4...

K11

K1R

Q P

R/

RQ

XG

FL

+26V

2 4 5 6 7 8 9

K2

GN

D2

W3

K8 K11

K10

K12

CAN

/XS

bus

PO 2

6V R

E

X42:

1

5

for

for

EZX4

5/

orEZ

X19

EZX4

5or

/W

NX2

1

1WA

X42

/ 1

WA

X52

for

2W

A

X2:A

24

X2:C

24

RQ

PR

/

sele

ct c

orre

ctio

n 1

(thic

knes

s)se

lect

cor

rect

ion

2 (th

ickn

ess)

sele

ct e

xt A

PRT

prog

ram

sele

ct to

mo

time

switc

h bu

cky

1

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

pre

para

tion

com

mon

for e

xpos

ure

switc

h of

regi

stra

tion

devi

ce

SL C

O 1

SL C

O 2

SL P

G 1

...8

SL T

O T

M 1

...8

SL X

G T

OSW

BU

1SW

BU

2SW

SF

CF

1

K14

X1:C

3XG

RD

EX

1

K15

X1:A

6XG

RD

EX

2

6 7 8 9 10

SL P

G 8

Tom

o m

ode

X1:A

32

2

2XG

RD

EX

3X1

:A8

K16

K17

Tom

o re

ady

Buck

y re

ady

X1:C

32

102

EXO

N

Uni

vers

al

Inte

rface

Log

ic

I/O in

terfa

ce

I/O

Bidi

rect

iona

l

K14

K15

K16

K17

X1:A

29

X1:C

29

CAN

HC

AN L

CO

D1.

..3

Mne

mon

ics

EN X

/

CTR

L X/

EX C

D

CO

M E

X C

D

EX O

N

W11

CM

EX

SW 1

...4

GN

D 2

IT 0

V

3

2

max

. I

= 1A

XG R

D E

X 4

3 8 10

Buck

y 1(

3)

1

cont

act

4512 983 05571

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

2Z--2.0

RGDV programming

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05591_010

E1997 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

(01.0)4512 983 05591

-Nam

e:

- DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

--Tube

:--Release

circuitnum

ber:

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:--Syncm

asterpresent:

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

--Conedensity

correction:

--Dosemeasurementinput:

--Dosemeasurementsensor:

--Exposureseries/Tomomovem

ent(Nobreakafterexposureend):

--Release

delay:

--Mounted

radiographicalcontroller:

--Release

circuitadaptationunit:

--Mounted

tomoextension:

--MediumIIformatkV

correction(doseequiv.steps):

--MediumIIformatdensity

correction(6%steps):

--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):

--SmallIIformatkV


--SmallIIformatdensity


--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

--Usedforfluoroscopy

:--CTaddon

:--Disabletim

eoverride:

--Tube

powerfactor:

--kV

steps:

--mAssteps:

--mAsteps:

--tim

esteps:

--Densitysteps:

--Densitycorrection(6%steps):

--Underexposuredisplay:

--Tube

overload

protection:

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomo1W

A\Tomotime[s]:

Tomomodesw

itch

Tomotim

e1:

Tomotim

e5:

RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]

RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

Tomotim

e2:

Tomotim

e6:

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

Tomotim

e3:

Tomotim

e7:

ucy

GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]

RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

Tomotim

e4:

Tomotim

e8:

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11

:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize

correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X

11:1Format+:5Tomoready

switchrelatedX11:3---->

Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

(a/01.0) 2Z--2.2

RGDV programming: example 2

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05611_2Z--2_2_a010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512 983 05611

-BuckyDiagnostTHwithBucky-C

ontroller

Nam

e:

-D76

:Exposure

Scopo/B

V-D

SI

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

D76

Scopo

D76

BV--DSI

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

11

--Tube

:1

11

12

2--Release

circuitnum

ber:

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

12

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

nono

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

00

--Conedensity

correction:

00

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22

EZX41


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Scopo

amplimat

photosensor/

amplimatinput


ent:

nono

nono

yes

yes

--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

none

none

--Release


none

none

none

none

1WB

1WB

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00

001)



00

00

001)


00

00

001)

--SmallIIformatkV


00

00

001)



00

00

001)


00

00

001)

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono

nono


:no

nono

noyes

yes

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

no--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

nono

--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)

12%


00

00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onon

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomo1W

A\Tomotime[s]:

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]

RGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy

GRGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]

RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05631_2Z--2_4_a010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.4


(a/01.0)4512 983 05631

HDH:without/[with

tomotim

einput]

Nam

e:

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

Freecassette

USA

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV4

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

11

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

3(4)

4--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

noyes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00

0--Dosemeasurementinput:

EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

none


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

(Bucky

amplimat)

--Exposureseries/Tom

omovem

ent:

noyes

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


none

none

none

none

none

--Release


1WA

1WA

1WA

none

1WA

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

(1WA)

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00

0--MediumIIformatdensity


00

00

0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):

00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00

0--SmallIIformatdensity


00

00

0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):

00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

nono

(yes)

nono

no--Usedforfluoroscopy

:no

nono

nono

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):

00

00

0--Underexposuredisplay:

yes

noyes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomo1W

A\Tomotime[s]:

Tomomodesw

itch

dis(en)able

disable

Tomotim

e1:

0,8

Tomotim

e5:

0,1


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV1

none

Tomotim

e2:

3,2

Tomotim

e6:

0,1

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

RGDV3

none

Tomotim

e3:

0,8

Tomotim

e7:

0,1

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

none

none

Tomotim

e4:

3,2

Tomotim

e8:

0,1

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV2

none

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05641_2Z--2_5_a010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.5


(a/01.0)4512 983 05641

BuckyD

IAGNOSTwithBucky-C

ontroller

Nam

e:

TH/TH2/D

igitalDiagnost

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

--Tube

:1

11

1--Release

circuitnum

ber:

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

--Release


none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

no--CTaddon

:no

nono

no--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05651_2Z--2_6_010

E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.6


(01.0)4512 983 05651

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTS

Nam

e:

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

--Tube

:1

11

1--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

2(1)

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

no--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat


omovem

ent:

noyes

nono

--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


none

none

none

none

--Release


1WA

1WA

1WA

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

1WA

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

no--CTaddon

:no

nono

no--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseeqiv.1

)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12


00

00


yes

noyes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

enable

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV1

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

none

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

none

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV2

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05671_2Z--2_8_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.8


(01.0)4512 983 05671

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTHanyversionwithBucky-C

ontroller

Nam

e:

Generotorequipped

with/w

ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA

Aux.forMCS(only)=RGDV4combined

withfree

cassette

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

MCS

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV4

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

11

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

11

1--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Bucky

amplimat


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

--Release


none

none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

nono

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05681_2Z--2_9_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.9


(01.0)4512 983 05681

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTHanyversion

Nam

e:

Generotorequipped

with/w


Aux.forMCS(only)=anyofRGDV5...8

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

MCS

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

11

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

11

1--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

no--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Bucky

amplimat


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

none

--Release


none

none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

nono

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05691_2Z--2_10_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.10


(01.0)4512 983 05691

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTHanyversion

Nam

e:

Generotorequipped

with/w


Aux.forTraumaD

iagnost(only)=anyofRGDV5...8

Aux.RGDV1...4mustnotbeusedwithaBuckyTHstystemviaCAN

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

Trauma

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

12

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

11

1--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

no--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Scopo

amplimat


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

none

--Release


none

none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

noyes

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121


4-1...4-38 (02.0)

Z1--15.1 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05571 2Z--2.8 (01.0) A4 4512 983 05671Z2--15.1 (97.0) A3/A3 4512 983 05741 2Z--2.9 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056812Z--2.0 01.0) A4 4512 983 05591 2Z--2.10 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056912Z--2.2 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05611 2Z--3 (97.0) A3 4512 983 057212Z--2.4 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05631 2Z--4 (97.0) A4 4512 983 057712Z--2.5 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05641 2Z--5 (97.0) A4 4512 983 057312Z--2.6 (01.0) A4 4512 983 05651


Contents1.3. Tube adjustment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1. Tube conditioning 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1.1. Preconditions / Programmings 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1.2. Procedure 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2. Tube adaptation 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2.1. General information 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2.2. Preconditions / Programmings 4--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2.3. Procedure 4--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.3. Final tube adjustment work 4--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.4. Problems during adaptation - Symptoms and solutions 4--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Dose rate control 4--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.1. AMPLIMAT sensitivity 4--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2. Screen/film combinations 4--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2.1. Automatic DRC processing 4--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2.2. Manual DRC processing 4--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2.3. Density correction for AEC technique (option) 4--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.3. Fault exposure detection 4--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Application limits 4--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.1. X-mode limits 4--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.2. Thoravison limits 4--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. Human interface 4--19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.1. Additional program settings for generators without option APR 4--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.2. Language 4--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.3. Automatic programming of APRs (option) 4--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4. Manual programming of APRs (option) 4--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4.1. Creating menus 4--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4.2. Creating sub menus 4--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4.3. Assigning APRs 4--26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5. Changing of APR radiation parameters 4--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5.1. Density correction for non-AEC techniques 4--30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5.2. AEC fixed current (kV-mA) 4--30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.6. Moving / copying of an APR data set 4--31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.7. Deleting of APRs 4--32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.8. Manipulating menus 4--33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.9. External APR assignment 4--34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7. Option: Tomo Density Control TDC 4--36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8. Option: VARIOFOCUS 4--37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9. Option: Area Dose Calculator 4--37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10. Acceptance test 4--37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11. Interlock facility for APR modification 4--38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12. Backup of all configuration data 4--38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4512--983--06121

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.3. Tube adjustment

1.3.1. Tube conditioning

DWARNING

Radiation is released during the conditioning procedure!

1.3.1.1. Preconditions / Programmings

Switch OFF the generator.



-- DigitalDiagnost

-- Thoravision


System Connector

EZX23

signal bus





Thoravision X X X


NOTEThe programming procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes

after the generator has been switched ON.

Perform the following programmings temporarily for each tube connected to one of the assignedRGDV = Free cassetteSelect menu XRGSCOPE:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV#/ DATA SET A

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

Programming Temporarily Original Tube

Enable handswitch ...... YES

Syncmaster present NO

Exposure switch type Double Step Verify the customizedentries in 2Z--2.x

Exposure series / Tomo ...... YESentries in 2Z--2.x

Mounted radiographic ...... NONE

RESET the generator.

Select appropriate programmed RGDV = “Free cassette” for the tube to be conditioned.

1.3.1.2. Procedure

Select large focus only.

NOTEThe generator must be in the READY state.

Run reconditioning procedure for an adapted tube, refer to following table, left column TUBE ADAPTED.

or

Run conditioning procedure for a new or non-adapted tube, refer to following table right column TUBE NOTADAPTED.

It is recommended that the high tension be monitored during conditioning.Connect the scope:

Channel1: kV AV HT at EZ130 X3 (1V/div), scale: 20kV/VTrigger external: CTRL_X_C/ at backpanel EZ X74, negative slopeTime base: 2ms/div

In case of problems like tube arcing see the following flowchart EXPOSURE SEQUENCE as an example.The flowchart applies for applicable kV range only, e. g.:109kV is the max. kV value for normal application, perform just up to next higher kV step = 117kV.

NOTERefer to flowchart EXPOSURE SEQUENCE.

If the tube arcs at a certain kV value, switch another 3 exposures with same parameters and 10s pause

between subsequent exposures. In case of success (no arcing anymore) continue with next kV step of the

following table.

If the last exposure still arcs go one kV step back and follow normal procedure. If this routine has been

performed three times without improvement: ==> Replace the tube!

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

Exposure parameters for conditioningTube adapted # exposures Tube not adapted

kV mA ms kV mAs80 10 50 < 1 > 80 0.5

80 10 500 < 1 > 80 5

80 200 250 < 1 > 80 50

10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause

80 max. mA 100 < 1 > 80 100

1 minute pause 1 minute pause

90 10 50 < 1 > 90 0.5

90 10 500 < 1 > 90 5

90 200 250 < 1 > 90 50


90 max. mA 100 < 1 > 90 100


100 10 50 < 1 > 100 0.5

100 10 500 < 1 > 100 5

100 200 250 < 1 > 100 50


100 max. mA 100 < 1 > 100 100


110 10 50 < 1 > 110 0.5

110 10 500 < 1 > 110 5

110 200 250 < 1 > 110 50


110 max. mA 100 < 1 > 110 100


120 10 50 < 1 > 120 0.5

120 10 500 < 1 > 120 5

120 200 250 < 1 > 120 50


120 max. mA 100 < 1 > 120 100


130 10 50 < 1 > 130 0.5

130 10 500 < 1 > 130 5

130 200 250 < 1 > 130 50


130 max. mA 100 < 1 > 130 100


Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

Exposure parameters for conditioningTube adapted # exposures Tube not adapted

kV mA ms kV mAs140 10 50 < 1 > 140 0.5

140 10 500 < 1 > 140 5

140 200 250 < 1 > 140 50


140 max. mA 100 < 1 > 140 100


145 10 50 < 1 > 145 0.5

145 10 500 < 1 > 145 5

145 200 250 < 1 > 145 50


145 max. mA 100 < 1 > 145 100


148 10 50 < 1 > 148 0.5

148 10 500 < 1 > 148 5

148 200 250 < 1 > 148 50


148 max. mA 100 < 1 > 148 100


150 10 50 < 1 > 150 0.5

150 10 500 < 1 > 150 5

150 200 250 < 1 > 150 50


150 max. mA 100 < 1 > 150 100


Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

NOTEIf a tube arcs at any kV value which is not required for application the max. kV (e.g.117kV) program this new

limit value by XRGSCOPE:

PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE LIMITS/ MAX. TUBE VOLTAGE LIMIT [kV]/ [117]

As the limit value decreases for this reason, a following re-adaptation procedure sets the fieldADAPTED TO [kV] to this value as well.

Set RGDV programming to original status if no adaptation procedure has to be executed.


394H00

Exposure sequencekV step 180kV

kV step n

kV step n+1

kV step n+2

still arcing?yesno

max.3

loops

= kV limitEND

3 exposureswith sameparameters.Wait 10safter eachexposure!

exposurewith arcing

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.3.2. Tube adaptation

DWARNING

Radiation is released during the adaptation procedure!

1.3.2.1. General information

Tube adaptation is an automatic process which includes:

1. The measurement of the mA offset value that is caused by:

-- the kV measuring circuit

-- the emission current feedback circuit (VCO)

2. The measurement of the individual standby filament current (based on 100µA).

3. The emission current characteristic as f (kV, filament current).

4. The dynamic behavior (positive and negative boost adaptation) where the inertia of the filament with respectto heating up and cooling down is registered.For more information refer to subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAd section 3: FAULT FINDING.

NOTEIn case of problems check the symptom / solution list at the end of this adjustment chapter. Repeat the

adaptation for this particular focus.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.3.2.2. Preconditions / Programmings




-- DigitalDiagnost

-- Thoravision


System Connector

EZX23

signal bus





Thoravision X X X


NOTEThe adaption procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes after the

generator has been switched ON.

The tube must be conditioned as described in chapter 1.3.1 “Tube conditioning”.

Check the upper kV limitSelect menu XRGSCOPE:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE LIMITS/ MAX. TUBE VOLTAGE LIMIT [kV]

The programmed value shouldmatch the nominal value of the tube connected or in caseof older tubes theupperkV limit should be set to the max. application kV.Once an adaptation is completed the new limit value indicates as ADAPTED TO [kV].

Perform the following programmings temporarily for each tube connected to one of the assignedRGDV = Free cassetteSelect menu XRGSCOPE:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV#/ DATA SET A

Programming Temporarily Original Tube

Enable handswitch ...... YES

Syncmaster present NO

Exposure switch type Double Step Verify the customizedentries in 2Z--2.x

Exposure series / Tomo ...... YESentries in 2Z--2.x

Mounted radiographic ...... NONE

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.3.2.3. Procedure


It is recommended that the high tension be monitored during adaptation.Connect the scope:Channel1: kV AV HT at EZ130 X3 (1V/div), scale: 20kV/VTrigger external: CTRL_X_C/ at backpanel EZ X74, negative slopeTime base: 2ms/div

Select the RGDV = Free cassette for the tube to be adapted.

Select menu XRGSCOPE:OPTIMUS XRG/ ADJUST/ TUBE ADAPTATION

Select the tube and focus to be adapted, start with small focus!

NOTETo avoid any malfunction make sure that READY is displayed on the desk before transmitting data by pushing

<F2>:

READY state disappears, ADAP is displayed on the desk, WAITING is displayed on the PC screen.

Wait until the generator turns back to READY state.

Start the adaptation process by pushing the handswitch in PREP and EXP position continuously.

The generator switches about 125 exposures for each focus. The radiation sign at the desk indicates exposuresbut there is no beep at the end of each exposure.The actual kV parameters are displayed during adaptation.

The generator carries out the adaptation automatically. The procedure for one focus is completedwhen thedeskindication changes from ADAP to TEST. The WAITING message disappears from the PC screen together witha PC beep, followed by the screen: BEFORE CONTINUING THE GENERATOR MUST BE RESET.


Run the adaptation for each focus (small and large) and tube.

NOTEAs there is no tube type with a physical third (middle) focus yet, the third focus can not be adapted.

VARIOFOCUS values are calculated by adapted small and large focus. APR programs using VARIOFOCUS

can only be selected until small and large focus are both adapted.

Set RGDV(s) programming to original status according to table “RGDV programming” 2Z--2.x in the end of thismodul.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.3.3. Final tube adjustment work

1. BuckyDiagnost TH with CAN interface, DigitalDiagnost, Thoravision:


Reestablish signal bus connector EZX23.

Reestablish CAN connectors EZX42--1 and EZX43--1.


2. All other systems:

Reset the generator.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.3.4. Problems during adaptation - Symptoms and solutions

1. A warning cannot be displayed on the control desk, the WAITING screen on the PC is flickering instead duringthis event and logged in the error log index.

2. If the tube has already been at a high temperature level (but the tube load indication still indicates green orgreen-yellow for 100%power) it might happen that the load indication changes straight to redand theadaptationis on hold. WAITING is flickering on the PC.Solution: Keep the handswitch pushed, once the temperature is down adaptation continues automatically.

NOTEAn increment of one of the temperature levels inhibits the 100% power condition. This event is always logged

as warning 00BV in the error log index.

3. Anerrormessage just flashes for a very shortmoment and is instantly covered byADAP on the desk afterwards.WAITING is flickering on the PC.

4. All buttons at the control desk including the RESET button are inactive during adaptation.The only way to RESET an error is to release the PREP switch which causes an interrupt similar to the RESETcommand.

5. After letting go of the PREP switchwait until the desk indicates READY. If READY does not appear at least after20 seconds run a warmstart of the generator by pushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.

6. If adaptation seems to do nothing for more than 30 seconds let go of the PREP switch. Wait until the deskindicates READY. If READY does not appear at least after 20 seconds run a warmstart of the generator bypushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.

7. If a constant READY indication appears for more than 2 seconds while PREP and EXP is activated by thehandswitch during adaptation let go of the handswitch.Wait until the desk indicates READY. If READY does not appear at least after 20 seconds run a warmstart ofthe generator by pushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.

8. If adaptation does not carry on with or without READY indication check whether one of the function unitsindicates a FATALerror by turning on the redLED. Let go of the handswitch and runawarmstart of thegeneratorby pushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.

9. If adaptation has been interrupted by a generator warmstart check the error log index before restartingadaptation:kV errors 02WG and/or 02WH indicate tube arcing. Run conditioning of the tube as described in chapter 1.3.1and/or reduce the max. kV value to the required application value.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.4. Dose rate control

1.4.1. AMPLIMAT sensitivity

Select menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL AMPLIMAT/ SENSITIVITY

Depending on HW programming of jumper EZ150:W4. W4 programs sensitivity accordingly:

high = × 4 = EZ150:W4 in position 1===> All screen/film combinations with a system speed > 200.

low = × 1 = EZ150:W4 in position 3===> At least one screen/film combination with a system speed ≤ 200.

1.4.2. Screen/film combinations

5 screen/film combinations can be programmed for each of the 5 measuring chambers:

Select menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL/ AMPLIMAT CHAMBER 1 ... 5/ DATA SET 1 ... 5

The number of the chamber corresponds to the specified unit number of the dose measuring unit.

The choice between automatic and manual DRC processing is possible when an authorized hardware key isinserted in the PC.

Automatic is selected as default and must be used for the initial programming.Data sets of adjacent rooms can be copied but have to be aligned afterwards.

Access manual DRC processing by pushing the <ESC> key.The manual mode is suitable for:

-- Copying complete programming to other measuring chambers.

-- Setting the basic density.

-- Changing the desk-displayed names of the programmed screen/film combinations.

-- Creating backups of the DRC programmings.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.4.2.1. Automatic DRC processing

Select the desired data from the files offered for the following programming steps.

The files are part of the installation software.

-- Select the programming field with the cursor and enter <RETURN>.

-- Enter the desired file from the list offered.

-- Select the desired data as required.

FILM File ”film.tdl”: Film types according to description of the manufacturer.

File ”film_bl/ _gr/ _uv.tdl”: General classification of the film according to color,sensitivity S and RLF compensation.

SCREEN File ”screen.tdl”: Screen types according to description of themanufacturer.

File ”lumat_lg.tdl”: Screen types according to luminous matter.

CHAMBER File ”chamber.tdl”: Different types of measuring chambers.

CASSETTE File ”cassette.tdl”: Different types of cassettes.

SYSTEM CORRECTION File ”syscor.tdl”: Select ”no corr. (ISO 9236-1)”.

CORRECTION FACTOR Default: 1.0 Correction factor for switch-OFF dose.

Basedon the combinationof the components entered, theprocessor calculates the switch-OFFdose, kVcorrectionand RLF compensation. The name for the screen/film combination, e.g. ”B400”, is taken from the “screen” defaultdata set.

NOTEFilm, screen, etc. data selected are not directly stored in the generator.

It is recommended that they be entered in the table ”Data sets of chambers” 2Z--4 at the end of this modul.


Color and sensitivity class of the screen/film combination are displayed on the desk, e.g.: “B400”.Other screen/film combinations (data set 1 ... 5) for the chamber can be selected by the buttons.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.4.2.2. Manual DRC processing

The current data set of the screen/film combination is displayed.

* Abbreviation: Abbreviation for the screen/film combination.Example: B400 = blue, speedclass 400.

Dose Request Chamber: Senstitivity of the measuring chamber type in [mGy/V].

* Dose of FSC: Switch-OFF dose of the screen/film combination in [mGy].Linear ratio with respect to the film density.

kV70-Char. U_0 ... 9: Checkpoints for kV-dependent density correction.

kV70-Char. Drel_0 ... 9: Relative correction value for the dose.

RLF t_0 ... 9: Checkpoints for time-dependent density correction.(RLF = Reciprocity Law Failure).

RLF Drel_0 ... 9: Relative correction value for the dose.

* = Only these fields may be changed according to the system requirements.All other fields must not be changed.

If required, change the data and the abbreviation name.Usually no value except the basic density ”Dose of FSC” must be changed (see next page).

Transmit the data set with <F2>.


The SAVE <F3> and LOAD <F4> functions of XRGSCOPE permit straightforward copying of the measuringchamber programmings.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.4.2.3. Density correction for AEC technique (option)

Basic density per screen/film combination:

A hardware key is required at the PC for direct access to the switch-OFF dose.

S Make a test exposure for each screen/film combination.To do so, set the density correction = 0.

S Determine the density of the test exposures.

S Select menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL/ AMPLIMAT/ CHAMBER 1 ... 5/ DATA SET 1 ... 5

S Select manual DRC programming by pushing the <ESC> key.

S Correct the switch-OFF dose = “Dose of FSC” according to formular below:

Desired densityNew switch-OFF dose = -------------------------------- x Old switch-OFF dose

Measured density

S Transmit the data set by pushing the <F2> key.

S Repeat the procedure for each screen/film combination at each chamber.


The switch-OFF dose can be set on the PC even without a hardware key.To do so, call up the automatic DRC programming, repeat all the selections and change the correction factor forswitch-OFF dose accordingly. Each time this programming is called up all the selections must be repeated.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.4.3. Fault exposure detection

Fault exposure detection is switched ON as a default for AEC and TDC. If in the initial phase of an exposure toolittle dose is measured, the exposure is aborted to protect the patient.

-- Time of control measurement: 10% of backup time,min. 250ms at TDC

-- Dose minimum: 4% of set density voltage at AEC,4 ... 10% at TDC

-- Backup time AEC: Calculated time from 9.5 times mAs of the respective 2-factor technique,max. 4s

-- Backup time TDC: Exposure time set 0.3 ... 6s

This additional precaution can be switched OFF for both techniques individually in the menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL/ FAULT EXPOSURE DETECTION/ AEC OR TDC

For details see section “FAULT FINDING”, chapter “OPTIMUS AEC switch-OFF philosophy”.

This monitoring does not take effect in the following cases, irrespective of programming:

-- Using screen/film combinations with high speed in AEC technique.

-- Exposure time in TDC technique is shorter than 1s.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.5. Application limits

1.5.1. X-mode limits

Using the menu:PROGRAM/ APPLICATION LIMITS/ X-MODE LIMITS

Limit values can be defined for all available techniques. Some values look as if they are out of limit which they areindeed, but there are additional basic limit values programmed in the generator firmware. These are exposuretechnique dependent.

As an example the field of the ”Falling Load” technique:

X-ray Mode: AEC falling load kVMin. Time Limit [ms]: [1.00]Max. Time Limit [ms]: [60000.00]Min. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: [0.001]Max. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: [580.000]

Min. Time Limit [ms]: Is always 1ms for all non-AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) techniques.Exposures with AEC might be switched shorter than 1ms.

Max. Time Limit [ms]: Basic limits are technique dependent and can not be changed or increased:

AEC falling load kV 4000msAEC fixed current kV-mA 4000msTDC (Tomo Density Control) 6000ms

kV-mA-ms 16000msfree techniques kV-mAs 16000ms

kV-mAs-ms 16000ms

Min. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: The smallest mAs - product is 0.5mAs.AEC exposures with less than 0.5mAs are possible.

Max. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: The default mAs - product is 580mAs for all AEC-techniques.850mAs is the absolute limit the generator terminates.

NOTELocal limits have to be taken into consideration.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.5.2. Thoravison limits

The kV-dependent mAs limits can be accessed via the menu:PROGRAM/ APPLICATION LIMITS/ THORAVISION LIMITS

They are activated only in conjunction with an online Thoravision unit.A change may only be made if instructed to do so by the service center.

Reference files on floppy disk: -- ref_limx.tdl X-ray limits

Reference files on system disk Thoravision: -- TH_LI128.tdl-- TH_LI64.tdl-- TH_LI32.tdl = ref_limt.tdl

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6. Human interface

Note

The Optimus generator of this system might has been delivered without APRoption.Before spending time trying to load APR check:

XRGSCOPE>> Faultfind

>> Power ON Results>> APR disabled: [No ] = APR option present

APR disabled: [Yes] = No APR possible

If APR shall be possible orderMGR 0011 (change of an existing configuration)MGR 2181 APR

with the generator serial number.

A maximum of up to 1024 APRs can be stored in the generator.

On a single RGDV button either up to 80 APRs can be programmed directly (10 pages of 8 each) or up to 400APRsvia menus.

The initial data sets are called ### APR name ### and they all have the same exposure parameters.

They can be directly assigned or via menu and submenu levels to registration devices RGDV 1 ... 8.

In case TEST APR is displayed after selection of a registration device, at least this particular registration devicehas not been assigned to any APRs.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.1. Additional program settings for generators without option APR

In case of a generator without option APR9890 000 0282x, the menu/APRdisplay fieldmust be dark until selectionof all exam./aux. units.If it does not work AR_EMPTY.tdl must be loaded from the service disk for each exam./aux. unit.

In case TEST- APR appears in the menu/APR display field upon selection of the exam./aux. units, theAR_EMPTY.tdl can be loaded immediately because no APR/T is assigned to the exam./aux. unit.

In case another APR or menu appears on the desk it must be deleted before the AR_EMPTY.tdl can be loaded:

Delete the APR/T under each exam./aux. unit.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/MANUAL ASSIGNMENT/ DELETE MENU

After a RESET of the generator TEST APR appears in the menu/APR display field for each exam./aux. unit.

Now the AR_EMPTY.tdl can be loaded from the service disk for all exam./aux. units.

Load AR_EMPTY.tdl for all exam./aux. units.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/PREDEFINED ASSIGNMENTS

A list of possible TDL-files appears on the screen.

Select file ”AR_EMPTY.tdl” from the list.

Only “none APR” appears.

Extended APR data table

No APR Name Tomono.

Foc V[%]

kV mA ms mAs Dose[µGy]

Dens. Fieldsl m r

Techniquepref background

SpectralFilter

FSC Fluo.Curve

MenuName

SubmenuName

1 buckytable 1 1 77 600.0 53.3 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQ none 400 1

2 tomography 1 1 77 16.0 2000.0 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQt none 400 1

3 wallstand 1 1 77 600.0 53.3 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQ none 400 1

4 free cassette 1 1 77 600.0 53.3 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQ none 400 1

Select it for each active exam./aux. unit.

After a RESET of the generator the menu/APR display field is dark for all exam./aux. units.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.2. Language

Assign the desired language.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ SELECT LANGUAGE

A language menu appears:

-- English

-- German

-- French

-- Spanish

Select the desired language.


A table lists which characters can be displayed on the control desk and how they can be indicated/entered at theservice PC, e.g. for APR names, see 2Z--3 “List of characters”.

Certain characters can be generated at the PC only via the decimal code. To do so, push the <ALT> key on thePC and enter the numerical code.

1.6.3. Automatic programming of APRs (option)

NOTEPay attention in the rules of “PC and generator settings to avoid problems during up/downloading of

CU complete files” described in modul “Software XRGSCOPE” chapter 1.1 of this section.

The installation disk contains data files for a complete, typical APR programming in different languages.Standard APR programs for each application can easily and quickly be loaded for each registration device.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/PREDEFINED ASSIGNMENTS

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

All files consist of the the same format “A***my**.tdl”

Select with <TAB> and <UP--/DOWN-ARROWS> one of the files listed:

AR_EMPTY = for generators without APR option 9890 000 0282x

A******* = APR data file

***my** = Release month / year

*TS..V = Bucky TS with VARIOFOCUS RO 1648, RO 1750, SRO 2550 SRO 33 100

*T..V9 = Bucky TS with VARIOFOCUS SRO 0951

*CO = Cosmos

*D = DigitalDiagnost

*R = Radiography

*TR = Trauma

*TS = BuckyTS

*V = VARIOFOCUS RO 1648, RO 1750, SRO 2550, SRO 33 100

*V9 = VARIOFOCUS SRO 0951

*M = Mono focus tube

*P = Pediatrics

***DE(U) = German version

***ES(P) = Spanish version

***EN(G) = English version

***FR(A) = French version

Example: A D 91 V 9 EN.tdl

| | | | | |

| | | | | English version

| | | | Tube SRO 0951

| | | VARIOFOCUS

| | Release: September 2001

| DigitalDiagnost

APR data file

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

Some files contain data sets in a window: Available Examination Unit Type

Select one of the files listed and load it:

BUCKY GR = Bucky table APR group layer (menu technique)

BUCKY PA = Bucky table APR paging (scrolling through pages technique)

WALLSTAND GR = Bucky wallstand group

WALLSTAND PA = Bucky wallstand paging

FREE GR = Free technique (non-AEC) group

FREE PA = Free technique (non-AEC) paging

TOMO LT/HDH = Linear tomography with units HDH, BTS2, BTS4 group

TOMO LIN/PA = Linear tomography with units HDH, BTS2, BTS4 paging

TOMO BTC GR = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TC group

TOMO BTC PA = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TC paging

TOMO BTH GR = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TH group

TOMO BTH PA = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TH paging

Repeat this procedure for each registration device.


Now all APR programs which have been loaded are displayed on the desk.

If required:

Change the menus and the assignments of the APRs according to chapter 1.6.4.

Change the names and the contents of the APRs according to chapter 1.6.5.

NOTEIn case a complete APR program setting has to be replaced by another program setting, all other APR program

settings under the registration device concerned must be deleted first.

Use APRMAN.

For deleting a program setting call menu:

PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUAL

ASSIGNMENTS/ DELETE MENU

and select the blank line.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.4. Manual programming of APRs (option)

Use APRMAN.Select service menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/MANUAL ASSIGNMENT/ . . .

139H94

Manual APR and menu assignment possibilities via XRGSCOPE

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

. . . / APR Assignment / Assign APR( . . . / APR Deassign / Deassign APR )

Registration devicesRGDV 1...8

. . . / Menu Assignment / Assign Menu( . . . / Delete Menu )( . . . / Move Menu )( . . . / Rename Menu )

max. 10 pages

Submenu 1/1 1/2

2/1 2/2

3/1 3/2

4/1 MENU 2of4

max. 10 pages

Menu 1/1 1/2

2/1 2/2

3/1 3/2

4/1 4/2

max. 10 pages

APR 1/1 1/2

2/1 2/2

3/1 3/2

4/1 4/2

Next pageName field

Higher menu

Field coordinates not displayed

To deallocate menus, submenus or APR data

use the programming menus put in brackets ( ).

. . . / APR Assignment / Select Menu

. . . / APR Assignment / Assign APR( . . . / APR Deassign / Select Menu )( . . . / APR Deassign / Deassign APR )

RESET the generator

Changing ( e. g. name ):

Select APR from desk.

Program/ Human Interface/ APR Data Set . . .

. . . / Select APR Data Set

. . . / Change APR Data Set

. . . / Menu Assignment / Select Menu

. . . / Menu Assignment / Assign Menu( . . . / Delete Menu )( . . . / Move Menu )( . . . / Rename Menu )

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.4.1. Creating menus

Assign the desired menu.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/ASSIGN MENU

Enter the first menu name, e.g. <Body region 1>.

If required, change the location suggested in the display. Otherwise the next vacant location is assigned.

Enter the second menu name, e.g. <Body region 2>.

Etc.

1.6.4.2. Creating sub menus

Assign the desired sub menu.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/MENU ASSIGNMENT/ SELECT MENU

Select with the <CURSOR> from one of the windows a menu to be assigned with submenus.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/MENU ASSIGNMENT/ ASSIGN MENU

Enter the first submenu name, e.g. <Left side>.


Enter the second submenu name, e.g. <Right side>.

Etc.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.4.3. Assigning APRs

Assign desired APRs.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR ASSIGNMENT/ SELECT MENU

Select with the <CURSOR> from one of the windows a menu or submenu.If no menu layer is desired, proceed.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR ASSIGNMENT/ ASSIGN APR

Select from one of the windows an initial APR or an APR which has not been assigned.

Initial APR: ### APR name ###

Not assigned APR: e.g. <Thorax ap>


Assign the next APR.

Etc.


Only after a RESET of the generator the menus, submenus and APRs are displayed on the desk.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.5. Changing of APR radiation parameters

Select the APR to be changed on the desk, e.g. ### APR name ###.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ SELECT APR DATA SET

The number of the APR selected on the desk is displayed. Transmit data by pushing <F2>.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET

Change the contents of the APR, e.g. <NAME>, <kV> etc.

Select the kV value according to the dose-equivalent series:40--41--42--44--46--48--50--52--55--57--60--63--66--70--73--77--81--85--90--96--102--109--117--125--133--141--150 kV.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

Parameter Value Remark

APR number 1 ... 1024

APR name up to 16 characters

Focus− ∆ small− ∆ vario− ∆ large

VARIOFOCUS ratio [%] 20%, 35%, 50%, 65%, 80% of small focus

Dose measurement field (left) ∆ ON/OFFAEC operable

Dose measurement field (middle) ∆ ON/OFFAEC operableonly if at least

fi ld i ONDose measurement field (right) ∆ ON/OFF

yone field is ON

Preferred technique --non automatic--automatic

AEC technique-- AEC falling load kV-- AEC fixed current kV-mA-- TDC

No AEC technique-- kV-mA-ms-- kV-mAs-- kV-mAs-ms

Tube current max. factor [%] 1 ... 100

PSC U thin (dose equiv. steps) 0 ... 5

PSC U thick (dose equiv. steps) 0 ... 5

PSC Q thin (6% steps) 0 ... 10

PSC Q thick (6% steps) 0 ... 10

PSC dens. thin (6% steps) 0 ... 10 (max. limit = 8)

PSC dens. thick (6% steps) 0 ... 10 (max. limit = 8)

Exposure data U [kV] ∆ 40 ... 150

Exposure data I [mA] ∆ 0.1 ... 2000

Exposure data Q [mAs] ∆ 0,5 ... 850

Exposure time [ms] ∆ 1 ... 16000 (60000)

Exposure data density (6% steps) ∆ --40 ... +40 (max. limit = ±8)

Screen/film combination ∆ RGDV dependent Default = Data Set 1

Tomo no. 1 ... 16 assignment of a tomographic figure

Spectral filter

-- none-- 2mm Al-- 0.1mm Cu + 1mm Al-- 0.2mm Cu + 1mm Al

Default = none

* Fluoroscopy curve N/A no function

∆ = The basic setting of these data can also be performed from the desk (RESET + APR).Refer to the operator’s manual.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

The following parameters must also be taken into account for AEC techniques:

-- mAs: basis for calculating the backup time for AEC, the tube current for AEC fixed current (kV-mA)and the initial mA value for TDC

-- t: exposure time for TDC and AEC fixed currentFor details see chapters 1.6.5.2 and 1.7.

If AEC FIXED CURRENT kV-mA or TDC is programmed as the preferred technique, the kV/mA/s or kV/mAs/stechnique must be selected under NO AEC TECHNIQUE.

Transmit data by pushing <F2>.

Select the next APR on the desk, select it in the programming menu and change it.

Etc.


Organ-dependent correction:

S Select the APR to be changed on the desk.

S Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET

Transmit the displayed APR number by pushing the <F2> key.

S Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET

S Exposure data density: --40 ... +40 = correction in steps of 6%. Max. limit = ±8.

The number of correction steps must match the programmed step rate.

Example:The desk display has been programmed to 12% step rate in the menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICE/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ DATA SET B/ DENSITY STEPS

To be able to display a density correction of +1 for a certain APR, two corrections steps (2 x 6% = 12%) mustbe programmed under this APR.

S Select the next APR on the desk, select it in the programming menu and change it.

Etc.


Correction for each RGDV 1 ... 8:

This correction is possible but for reasons of clarity it should not be used.

S Select menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICE/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ DATA SET B

S Density correction: --8 ... +8 = correction in steps of 6%.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.5.1. Density correction for non-AEC techniques

The supplied APR standard sets are mostly based on a screen/film combination with a speed class of 400.APR’s for extremities and some other applications are based on a 100 or 200-type system. Depending on the localsituation the mAs or s parameters of all the relevant APRs must be adapted.

Example:The customer uses a 200-type system. To change from the existing 400 values the relevant APRs must bereprogrammed to double the mAs products or to double the exposure time (400 divided by 200 = 2).

Select the relevant APR at the control desk.

Set the new parameters at the control desk.

Save the new parameters as default values.To do this push the RESET button and the corresponding APR button. The asterisk in the APR name as anindication of overwritten data disappears.Use APRMAN.

1.6.5.2. AEC fixed current (kV-mA)

For this exposure technique the APRs must have the following programmings:

-- Dose measurement field: ON (at least 1 field must be set to ON)

-- Preferred technique: automatic

-- AEC technique: AEC fixed current kV-mA

-- No AEC technique: kV-mAs-ms technique (RUQT) or kV-mA-ms (RUIT)

-- Exposure data U: = anatomical kV value

-- Exposure data Q/I: = anatomical mAs/mA product based on the screen/film combination used

-- Exposure time t: = anatomical exposure time

The mA value is calculated automatically.

In the APR standard files supplied the following APR’s is programmed to kV-mA technique:

Dens axis F / dens axis F / dens axis F / atlas F( German / English / French / Spanish )

The APR is marked with F.

The mAs value is based on a 400-type screen/film combination andmust be adapted to the combinations actuallyused.E. g.: If a 200-type combination is used, the mAs value must be doubled.

If the TDC option is installed, the preferable technique for all exposures is the one where the exposure time is thedetermining factor. TDC is not restricted to tomography applications only.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.6. Moving / copying of an APR data set

Determination of the number of APR data set X to where APR data set Y is to be moved / copied.

Select APR data set X on the desk.


Note down the number of APR data set X, e.g. 100.

Changing of the number of APR data set Y to be moved / copied to the number of APR data set X

Select APR data set Y on the desk.


Transmit by pushing <F2>.


Replace the number of APR data set Y with the number of APR data set X in the input mask, e.g. nnn⇒ 100.

Transmit this number by pushing <F2>.


APR data set Y is displayed in place of the old APR data set X on the desk.In case APR data set Y is merely moved and not copied to the location of APR data set X, the original APR dataset Y must be deleted at the end of programming.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.7. Deleting of APRs

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR DEASSIGN/ SELECT MENU

Required only if the APR is assigned to a menu or submenu.

Select the associated menu or submenu from one of the windows.

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR DEASSIGN/ DEASSIGN APR

Select the APR to be deleted from one of the windows.


An APR which has been deleted is no longer displayed on the desk but remains stored in the generator.It can be re-activated according to chapter 1.6.4.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.8. Manipulating menus

Deleting:

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/DELETE MENU

Select the menu or submenu to be deleted from one of the windows.For deleting all APRs of an RGDV program select the blank line.


Shifting:

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/MOVE MENU

Select the menu or submenu from one of the windows.

Enter the new positions.


Renaming:

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/RENAME MENU

Select the menu or submenu from one of the windows.

Enter the name in the lowermost line.


Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.6.9. External APR assignment

A maximum of 2 external APRT modules can be connected to the OPTIMUS R/F via adapter 4 auxil. units 1WAand 2WA.Refer Z1--15.1 ”Adapter 4 auxil. units”.

Define the external APRT modules by placing links W1 through W3 on adapter WA.Also see table ”Assignment of the external APRT modules” below and Z1--15.1 ”Adapter 4 auxil. units”.

Program the desired APRT in the generator.

Select the desired APRT numbers for the external APRT modules from the RGDVs:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ SELECT APR DATA SET

Program the RGDVs that are to be switched over by the external APRT modules.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ EXTERNAL APRASSIGNMENT/ ...

.... DEVICE INTERFACE 1or

* .... DEVICE INTERFACE 3

Only two RGDVs can be programmed and, respectively, switched over. Once programmed these two RGDVs arevalid irrespective of the selected APRs of the other buttons of the module.

Program the APRs that are to be selected by the external APR/T modules.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ EXTERNAL APRASSIGNMENT/...

.... DEVICE INTERFACE 1 : 6 APR keys can be assigned for each RGDVand/or

.... DEVICE INTERFACE 2 : 8 APR keys can be assigned for each RGDVand/orand/or

* .... DEVICE INTERFACE 3 : 8 APR keys can be assigned for each RGDV

Enter the RGDVs and APRs programmed for the 3 device interfaces in table 2Z--5 ”Programming of deviceinterfaces”.

A A

RR

AA

A A

*WB

RR SCOPOMAT

A A

AA

AA

A A

A A

AA

AA

A A

WA / * 1WB 2WA / *WB

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

Assignment of the external APRT modules:

Deviceinterface Adapter

ProgrammingW1/W2/W3 Hardware connection Remark

1WAor

1 WAW1--W3 open

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 PO26V

SLPG 3

SLPG 4

SLPG 5

SLPG 6

RGDVSL (n)

RGDVSL (m)

SLPG 1

SLPG 2

WAX23

2 selectable RGDVs can beprogrammed. They areindependent of the APRsprogrammed.

Maximum number of APRs:6 x 8 (RGDV) = 48 APRs

Recommendation:2 APRs assigned to each button.

2 2 WA only W1 closed

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SLPG 5

SLPG 6

SLPG 7

SLPG 8

PO26V

SLPG 1

SLPG 2

SLPG 3

SLPG 4

2 WAX23

RGDV cannot be selected.

Maximum number of APRs:8 x 8 (RGDV) = 64 APRs

Recommendation:2 APRs assigned to each button.

Operation as 2 WA is possible alsowithout 1 WA.Refer to drawing Z2--15.1

Cabinet wiring:Decade adapter WA

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.7. Option: Tomo Density Control TDC

For this exposure technique the APRs must have the following programming:

-- Dose measurement field: ON (at least 1 field must be set to ON)

-- Preferred technique: automatic

-- AEC technique: TDC

-- No AEC technique: kV-mAs-ms technique (RUQT) or kV-mA-ms (RUIT)

-- Exposure data U: = anatomical kV

-- Exposure data Q/I: = anatomical mAs/mA product based on the screen/film combination used

-- Exposure time t: = anatomical exposure time

The mAs product is used to calculate the start current, indicated under “Exposure data I”.In the APR files supplied all the APRs for tomography applications are programmed to TDC. If there is no TDCoption installed, the manual technique is selected as the preferred technique automatically.

TDC is not restricted to tomography applications only so it can be preferred for all exposures where exposure timeis the determining factor.

The respective mAs product is generally based on a 400-type screen/film combination andmust be adapted to thecombinations actually used.E. g.: If a 200-type combination is used, the mAs product must be doubled.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.8. Option: VARIOFOCUS

For the VARIOFOCUS option, special APR files have to be loaded. These are designatedwith a ”V” in the file nameand contain correspondingly defined APRs.

VARIOFOCUS is programmed as a percentage mix of the small focus with the large focus.The following steps are possible:20%, 35%, 50%, 65% and 80% of the small focus.Default: 50%.

The percentage mix is not displayed directly on the control desk and can only be estimated indirectly via thesmall/large focus exposure time.

It is only possible to display and change the percentage mix via XRGSCOPE.


However, VARIOFOCUS can be selected via the control desk and can be stored as default focus for an APR,too.The default ratio is always 50%.

VARIOFOCUS is possible for tubes with superimposed focal spots only.

The following tubes are suitable for the application: RO 1648, RO 1750, SRO 0951, SRO 2550, SRO 33 100.

1.9. Option: Area Dose Calculator

This option operates in conjunction with a unit and a collimator which are CAN-controlled and supply informationabout SID, collimation and added filters only.

See subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAD section 6: ADJUSTMENTSchapter 1.x: Checking / Correction

1.10. Acceptance test

Execute the acceptance test.See subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAD section 7: ACCEPTANCE

Observe all applicable national regulations.

For U.S.A applications check the H.H.S requirements!

After completition of setting-to-work, the system must be tested for H.H.S. compliance according the P.M.S.I.comprehensive compliance testing workbook: Numeric code 4535 800 2035x.

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06121

1.11. Interlock facility for APR modification

Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR MODIFIABLE BY USER

It is possible to prevent a customer from being able to store APRmodifications as default setting via the controldesk.

Default: YES

1.12. Backup of all configuration data

A hardware key is required for the PC.

To save the configuration data use the CONFIGURATION BACKUP disk supplied.

Save the complete SW programming of the generator on the floppy disk by using the menu:ACCEPT/ BACKUP/ ...

1. ... RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENTS/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ APR ASSIGNMENTS

Use APRMAN.

After READING (turning bar) the PC offers the default backup name:Backup filename: APR_BAK1 ... 8.tdlThe name can be changed into any other file name.The path (harddisk) is automatically taken into account.It is also possible to type:

A:\”filename” <RETURN>to load the backup files directly to the floppy disk.

2. ... CU complete

NOTEPay attention to the rules of “PC and generator settings to avoid problems during up/downloading of

CU complete files” described in modul “Software XRGSCOPE” chapter 1.1 of this section.

A disk space of 700kByte is required.It takes about 8min to save the data to the disk.

The default backup name:Backup File Name: CUBACKUP.TDLThe name can be changed into any other filename.The path (harddisk) is automatically taken into account.It is also possible to type:

A:\”filename” <RETURN>to load the backup files directly to the floppy disk.

J

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

X1:C

27SL

TO

TM

8

X1:A

27SL

TO

TM

7

X1:C

26SL

TO

TM

6

X1:A

26

X1:C

25

SL T

O T

M 5

X1:A

25

SL T

O T

M 4

10tra

ject

orie

s


Z1-15.1

X2:A

9

X2:C

9

CO

M E

X C

D

X1:A

24

X1:C

24

EX C

D

IT 0

V

SL T

O T

M 1

SL T

O T

M 2

SL T

O T

M 3

K18

10R

EX O

N

X1:C

19

X1:A

12

X1:C

12

SW B

U 1

SW B

U 2

4 5 8

10

9

8 9

X1:A

21

X14

1 2 3

X13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

X AC

T/

EX C

D

t

500.

..600

ms

RQ

PQ

/

EXO

N

t

X1:A

10

4

3

4

X1:A

4

4

X1:C

6

3 4

X1:C

8

PO 2

6V R

E

X1:C

10

X1:A

C1

6 7 10

X1:C

205 6 7 82 3 4

codi

ng

gene

rato

r CAN

hig

h ac

tive

gene

rato

r CAN

low

act

ive

Expa

nsio

ns

GN

D S

or P

O 0

V

NR

PR

X/

PO 2

6V

expo

sure

end

grou

nd

com

mon

for e

xpos

ure

end

expo

sure

on

PO 2

6V R

E

RES

ET C

/

sign

al b

us e

nabl

e X-

ray

RQ

PR

/R

G D

V 1.

..4

sign

al b

us X

-ray

requ

est c

omm

and

RQ

PR

HS

sign

al b

us g

roun

d

+26V

sup

ply

emitt

er 0

V ex

posu

re o

n si

gnal

+26V

sup

ply

reve

rse

not r

eady

pre

parin

g fo

r X-ra

y

regi

stra

tion

devi

cesy

stem

RES

ET c

omm

and

requ

est p

repa

ratio

n

SW T

O 1

SW S

F C

F 2

SW T

O 2

TOM

O P

GTO

PG

1...

8TO

PG

SL

(SW

pro

gram

mab

le in

Dat

a Se

t A)

requ

est p

repa

ratio

n fro

m h

ands

witc

h

X AC

T/

V15

S or

PO

V

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

exp

osur

e

switc

h bu

cky

2

XG R

D E

X 1.

..4

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

fluo

rosc

opy

switc

h to

mog

raph

y 1

tom

o pr

ogra

m

switc

h to

mog

raph

y 2

sele

ct X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

tom

ogra

phy

tom

o m

ode

prog

ram

med

tom

o pr

ogra

m s

elec

ted

sign

al b

us +

15V

supp

ly

sign

al b

us X

-ray

activ

e

switc

h si

de fi

eld

to c

entra

l fie

ld b

ucky

mea

surin

g ch

ambe

r 1sw

itch

side

fiel

d to

cen

tral f

ield

buc

ky m

easu

ring

cham

ber 2

X-ra

y ge

nera

tor r

eady

for e

xpos

ure

requ

est

10

X1:A

13

X2:A

25R

Q S

N X

/

K13

PO 2

6V

RQ

XG

PR

1

RQ

XG

PR

2

RQ

XG

PR

3

RQ

XG

PR

4

X41:

1 PO 2

6V

CTR

L X/

RD

PR

X

X2:C

25

EN X

/N

R P

R X

/X2

:C26

W1

Selft

est

Star

t

Rea

dy

Erro

r

CAN

- an

noun

cem

ent

+m

ax.:

26V

1

10m

A

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Tom

o

X22

Tom

o tim

es

35

Form

at

6 7

(97.0)

8 9 10

X1:C

31

ADAP

_ b

ADAP

_ a

ADAP

_ a

===

2WA

1WA

WA

Func

tion

unit


Rel

ease

con

trol

(gal

vani

c de

coup

led)

1

2X23

4 5 6 7 8 9

SLPG

1

SLPG

2

SLPG

3

SLPG

4

SLPG

5

SLPG

6

6 7

Schr

./Kö

A1/A

3

Rel

ease

1(5

)

X2R

elea

se 2

(6)

c

Rel

ease

3(7

)

X3

)

Rel

ease

4(8

)

from

451

2 10

8 08

043

onw

ards

:- K

1 in

XG

RD

EX c

ircui

t

- sig

nal E

X C

D a

dded

K1V9

max

. 26V

,5A

1 3 10

+

+26V

GN

D2

RQ

PR

HS

RQ

XG

PR

02-0

3-19

X1 1

- V9

: max

. I in

crea

sed

from

1A

to 5

A

X1:A

3

+5V

8 9

K1

K14

K15

X1:C

4

Rel

ease

1...

4

K16

X1:A

7

RG

DV

1

K17

X1:A

9

X1:A

11

X1:A

5

5

8 9

X2:A

C14

V15

SPO

V

DC

GN

D S

X2:A

C15

PO 0

V

DC

CAN

H

CAN

L

RES

ET C

/

X2:A

C27

CO

D 1

CO

D 2

CO

D 3

+15V

X2:C

3

X2:A

3

X2:A

6

X2:A

21

X2:C

21

X2:A

22

Buck

y 2(

4)

X12

open

ed:

X11

1

2 3 4

SW S

F C

F 1

SW S

F C

F 2

Test

PR

EP

S2

Test

FLU

OR

O

S1

X1:A

30

X1:C

30

X21

TO P

G 1

TO P

G 2

TO P

G 3

TO P

G 4

TO P

G 5

TO P

G 6

TO P

G 7

X1:C

13

X1:A

14

X1:C

14

X1:A

15

X1:C

15

X1:A

16

SL P

G 7

X1:C

16

X1:A

17

X1:C

17

X41:

2

X52

W2

W1

W2

W3

requ

est s

ynch

roni

zatio

nR

Q S

N X

/R

Q X

G E

XR

Q X

G F

LR

Q X

G P

R1.

..4

inte

rface

K5 K4 K7 K6

PO 2

6VX AC

T/ W12

W13

GN

D 2

X42:

2

7

RG

DVS

L(n)

RG

DVS

L(m

)

WA

or 1

WA

2WA

I/O

Bidi

rect

iona

l

inte

rface

stat

us

X1:A

28

X1:C

28

X1:A

31

H1

K9

X1:A

18

X1:A

20

X1:C

18

X1:A

19

SL X

G T

O

SW T

O 1

SW T

O 2

9

EXO

N

1010

CM

EX

SW 1

clos

ed:

CM

EX

SW 2

CM

EX

SW 3

CM

EX

SW 4

X1:C

11

TO P

G 1

...8

K12

TO P

G S

L

RG

DV

2

RG

DV

35

RG

DV

45

RQ

XG

FL

6

GN

D 2

6 7

6 7 9

8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5PTC

X24

SL P

G 1

TOM

O P

G

SL P

G 2

SL P

G 3

TO P

G S

L

SL P

G 4

SL P

G 5

SL P

G 6

PO 2

6V

PO 2

6V

SL C

O 1

SL C

O 2

WA

1WA X5

1X4 1

1R

Q X

G E

X1

TO P

G 8

Exte

rnal

APR

T

K3

C75

I/O brai

n

X2:A

C28

2

Tom

o

X1:A

C2

X1:C

5

X1:C

7

X1:C

9

K14.

..K17

K4...

K11

K1R

Q P

R/

RQ

XG

FL

+26V

2 4 5 6 7 8 9

K2

GN

D2

W3

K8 K11

K10

K12

CAN

/XS

bus

PO 2

6V R

E

X42:

1

5

for

for

EZX4

5/

orEZ

X19

EZX4

5or

/W

NX2

1

1WA

X42

/ 1

WA

X52

for

2W

A

X2:A

24

X2:C

24

RQ

PR

/

sele

ct c

orre

ctio

n 1

(thic

knes

s)se

lect

cor

rect

ion

2 (th

ickn

ess)

sele

ct e

xt A

PRT

prog

ram

sele

ct to

mo

time

switc

h bu

cky

1

requ

est X

-ray

gene

rato

r for

pre

para

tion

com

mon

for e

xpos

ure

switc

h of

regi

stra

tion

devi

ce

SL C

O 1

SL C

O 2

SL P

G 1

...8

SL T

O T

M 1

...8

SL X

G T

OSW

BU

1SW

BU

2SW

SF

CF

1

K14

X1:C

3XG

RD

EX

1

K15

X1:A

6XG

RD

EX

2

6 7 8 9 10

SL P

G 8

Tom

o m

ode

X1:A

32

2

2XG

RD

EX

3X1

:A8

K16

K17

Tom

o re

ady

Buck

y re

ady

X1:C

32

102

EXO

N

Uni

vers

al

Inte

rface

Log

ic

I/O in

terfa

ce

I/O

Bidi

rect

iona

l

K14

K15

K16

K17

X1:A

29

X1:C

29

CAN

HC

AN L

CO

D1.

..3

Mne

mon

ics

EN X

/

CTR

L X/

EX C

D

CO

M E

X C

D

EX O

N

W11

CM

EX

SW 1

...4

GN

D 2

IT 0

V

3

2

max

. I

= 1A

XG R

D E

X 4

3 8 10

Buck

y 1(

3)

1

cont

act

4512 983 05571

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Cabinet rear side Cabinet rear side

X42

X22

WA X41

X52

X45

WB X41

(Photomultiplier)

WP

X41Z X19

WA X51

2WA X51

X52

2WA X41

X52

X51X51

WB X52WA X52

CAN/XS

Z X14

X45

WB X51

X19WB X41

Z

Z2-15.1

WA/WB/WPCabinet wiring:

WB X42

X42

X41

2WA

WA X51

Z X45

WA X41

X52

X51

X42

2WA X41 (2x WA)

WP

Adapter Photomultiplier (SEV)Decade adapter 4 auxil. units

(97.0)

A3/A

3


CAN/XS termination resistor is alweys installed at the end of the chain!

02-0

3-19

X19

X32

X52

WP X11

termination resistor

WA X51

WB X51


W

Z

orWB X51

X14

X51

WP X1

WB X41

2 Adapters: WA/2WA or WB/WAboth WA adapters installed in the option rack

WA X41

always installed beside the backpanel

WB adapter always installed beside the backpanel

Note: When installing a "2WA" adapter make suvethat link "W1" is inserted (see also Z1-15.1).

WA X51

or

Z X45

orX19WA X41

Schr

./Kö always installed on the left in the option rack

WB

WP

orWA

Z X21/X22/X31/X32/X41

X11

1 Adapter: WA or WB

Adapter: WP

CAN/XS

WBWB

or

3 Adapters: WA/2WA/WB

Z

X31

X51

Z X45

X21

X42

Z X19X41

X41

both WA adapters installed in the option rackWB adapter always installed beside the backpanel

Z X19 (2x WA)

WB X42X42

X1

X41WA X42

X42

X41

Cabinet rear side

or

X51 X51

WA X52WB X52

Z X45 (2x WA)or

WB X42X41

X42

WWA


X52

WA

orCAN/XS

2WA X51 (2x WA)

X52

2WA

X45

X41Z X19

4512 983 05741

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

2Z--2.0

RGDV programming

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05591_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

(01.0)4512 983 05591

-Nam

e:

- DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

--Tube

:--Release

circuitnum

ber:

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:--Syncm

asterpresent:

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

--Conedensity

correction:




ent(Nobreakafterexposureend):

--Release

delay:

--Mounted


--Release


--Mounted

tomoextension:

--MediumIIformatkV





--SmallIIformatkV





DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:


:--CTaddon

:--Disabletim

eoverride:

--Tube

powerfactor:

--kV

steps:

--mAssteps:

--mAsteps:

--tim

esteps:

--Densitysteps:



--Tube

overload

protection:

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomo1W

A\Tomotime[s]:

Tomomodesw

itch

Tomotim

e1:

Tomotim

e5:


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

Tomotim

e2:

Tomotim

e6:

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

Tomotim

e3:

Tomotim

e7:

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

Tomotim

e4:

Tomotim

e8:

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

(a/01.0) 2Z--2.2


A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05611_2Z--2_2_a010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512 983 05611

-BuckyDiagnostTHwithBucky-C

ontroller

Nam

e:

-D76

:Exposure

Scopo/B

V-D

SI

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

D76

Scopo

D76

BV--DSI

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

11

--Tube

:1

11

12

2--Release

circuitnum

ber:

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

12

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

nono

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

00

--Conedensity

correction:

00

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22

EZX41


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Scopo

amplimat

photosensor/

amplimatinput


ent:

nono

nono

yes

yes

--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

none

none

--Release


none

none

none

none

1WB

1WB

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00

001)



00

00

001)


00

00

001)

--SmallIIformatkV


00

00

001)



00

00

001)


00

00

001)

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono

nono


:no

nono

noyes

yes

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

no--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

nono

--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)Doseequiv.

1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)

12%


00

00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onon

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomo1W

A\Tomotime[s]:

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]

RGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy

GRGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]

RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05631_2Z--2_4_a010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.4


(a/01.0)4512 983 05631

HDH:without/[with

tomotim

einput]

Nam

e:

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

Freecassette

USA

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV4

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

11

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

3(4)

4--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

noyes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

none


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

(Bucky

amplimat)


omovem

ent:

noyes

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


none

none

none

none

none

--Release


1WA

1WA

1WA

none

1WA

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

(1WA)

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

nono

(yes)

nono


:no

nono

nono

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12


00

00


yes

noyes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomo1W

A\Tomotime[s]:

Tomomodesw

itch

dis(en)able

disable

Tomotim

e1:

0,8

Tomotim

e5:

0,1


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV1

none

Tomotim

e2:

3,2

Tomotim

e6:

0,1

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

RGDV3

none

Tomotim

e3:

0,8

Tomotim

e7:

0,1

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

none

none

Tomotim

e4:

3,2

Tomotim

e8:

0,1

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV2

none

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05641_2Z--2_5_a010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.5


(a/01.0)4512 983 05641

BuckyD

IAGNOSTwithBucky-C

ontroller

Nam

e:

TH/TH2/D

igitalDiagnost

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

--Tube

:1

11

1--Release

circuitnum

ber:

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

donotcare

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

--Release


none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

no--CTaddon

:no

nono

no--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05651_2Z--2_6_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.6


(01.0)4512 983 05651

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTS

Nam

e:

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

--Tube

:1

11

1--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

2(1)

--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

no--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat


omovem

ent:

noyes

nono

--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


none

none

none

none

--Release


1WA

1WA

1WA

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

1WA

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

no--CTaddon

:no

nono

no--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseeqiv.1

)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12


00

00


yes

noyes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

Bucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

enable

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV1

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

none

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

none

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

RGDV2

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05671_2Z--2_8_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.8


(01.0)4512 983 05671

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTHanyversionwithBucky-C

ontroller

Nam

e:

Generotorequipped

with/w


Aux.forMCS(only)=RGDV4combined

withfree

cassette

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

MCS

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV4

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

11

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

11

1--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Bucky

amplimat


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

--Release


none

none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

nono

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05681_2Z--2_9_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.9


(01.0)4512 983 05681

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTHanyversion

Nam

e:

Generotorequipped

with/w


Aux.forMCS(only)=anyofRGDV5...8

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

MCS

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

11

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

11

1--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

no--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Bucky

amplimat


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

none

--Release


none

none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

nono

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

A4

02--02--18

We

4512--983--05691_2Z--2_10_010


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

2Z--2.10


(01.0)4512 983 05691

BuckyD

IAGNOSTTHanyversion

Nam

e:

Generotorequipped

with/w


Aux.forTraumaD

iagnost(only)=anyofRGDV5...8

Aux.RGDV1...4mustnotbeusedwithaBuckyTHstystemviaCAN

Bucky

Tomo

Bucky

wallstand

Freecassette

Trauma

DataSetA:

Desk:

RGDV1

RGDV2

RGDV3

RGDV4

RGDV5

RGDV6

RGDV7

RGDV8

--Room:

11

11

1--Tube

:1

11

12

--Release

circuitnum

ber:

11

11

1--Enablehandsw

itchatgeneratordesk

:yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Syncm

asterpresent:

yes

yes

yes

yes

no--Exposuresw

itchtype

:doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

doublestep

--Bucky

formatdensity

correction:

00

00

0--Conedensity

correction:

00

00


EZX21

none

/[EZX21]

EZX31

none

EZX22


Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

Bucky

amplimat

(Bucky

amplimat)

Scopo

amplimat


omovem

ent:

nono

nono

no--Release

delay:

enable

enable

enable

enable

enable

--Mounted


Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

Bucky

contr.1/

DigitalDiagnost

none

--Release


none

none

none

none

none

--Mounted

tomoextension:

none

none

none

none

none

--MediumIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0--SmallIIformatkV


00

00



00

00


00

00

0

DataSetB:

--Usedfortomo:

noyes

nono


:no

nono

noyes

--CTaddon

:no

nono

nono

--Disabletim

eoverride:

nono

nono

no--Tube

powerfactor:

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

--kV

steps:

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

Doseequiv.1)

--mAssteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--mAsteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--tim

esteps:

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)25

%1)

25%

1)

--Densitysteps:

12%

1)12

%1)

12%

1)12

%12

%1)


00

00


yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

--Tube

overload

protection:

onon

onon

onBucky/S

copo1W

B/D

ecadeBucky1(W

BX11):

Bucky/Tomo1W

A:DecadeBucky1/2

WAX11

WAX12

Bucky/Tomotime

Tomomodesw

itch

--------

--------

Tomotim

e1:

--------

Tomotim

e5:

--------


RGDV4[]

Bucky

RGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Tomotim

e2:

--------

Tomotim

e6:

--------

Bucky

RGDV:

[]

[]

[]

RGDV4[]


Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e3:

--------

Tomotim

e7:

--------

ucy


RGDV8[]

Bucky

RGDV

--------

--------

Tomotim

e4:

--------

Tomotim

e8:

--------

RGDV8[]

TomoRGDV--sw

itchrelated

--------

--------

Timesetting

forinputatW

AX21:1......8

ForWBX11


correction

contact)

Tomomodesw

itch:X

11:3SL_XG_TO/B

ucky

RGDV:X

11:1Format+:10Bucky

ready/Tom

oRGDV:X



Bucky

--Tomoremotesw

itchoverRGDVs

1)=

hastobe

adjusteton

site

[]=

TDC

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

2Z--3E 1997 Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

(97.0)OPTIMUS CDOPTIMUS R/F4512 983 05721

Character display on the control desk

English German French Spanish

Possible PCdisplay

(code 850)

Inputat the PC

! ! ! ! !

# # £ £ #

$ $ $ $ $

% % % % %

& & & & &

’ ’ ’ ’ ’

( ( ( ( (

) ) ) ) )

* * * * *

+ + + + +

, , , , ,

-- -- -- -- --

. . . . .

/ / / / /

0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9

: : : : :

; ; ; ; ;

< < < < <

= = = = =

> > > > >

? ? ? ? ?

@ § à § @

A A A A A

B B B B B

C C C C C

D D D D D

E E E E E

F F F F F

G G G G G

H H H H H

I I I I I

J J J J J

K K K K K

L L L L L

M M M M M

N N N N N

O O O O O

P P P P P

Q Q Q Q Q



Possible PCdisplay

(code 850)

Inputat the PC

R R R R R

S S S S S

T T T T T

U U U U U

V V V V V

W W W W W

X X X X X

Y Y Y Y Y

Z Z Z Z Z

[ Ä . i [

\ Ö ç Ñ \

] Ü § ¿ ]

^ ^ ^ ^ ^

_ _ _ _ _

’ ’ ’ ’ ’

a a a a a

b b b b b

c c c c c

d d d d d

e e e e e

f f f f f

g g g g g

h h h h h

i i i i i

j j j j j

k k k k k

l l l l l

m m m m m

n n n n n

o o o o o

p p p p p

q q q q q

r r r r r

s s s s s

t t t t t

u u u u u

v v v v v

w w w w w

x x x x x

y y y y y

z z z z z

ä é G Alt +123

¦ ö ù ñ ¦ Alt +124

ü é Ç Alt +125

~ ß -- ~ ~ Alt +126

Alt +127

á Alt +160

J J J J í Alt +161

ó Alt +162



Possible PCdisplay

(code 850)

Inputat the PC

£ £ £ £ ú Alt +163

G G G G ñ Alt +164

§ § § § º Alt +167

¿ Alt +168

R Alt +169

Alt +170

½ Alt +171

Alt +172

Alt +173

Alt +174

Alt +175

_ _ _ _ Alt +176

Alt +177

2 2 2 2 Alt +178

À À À À Alt +192

Á Á Á Á Alt +193

Â Â Â Â > Alt +194

Ã Ã Ã Ã Alt +195

Ä Ä Ä Ä Alt +196

Å Å Å Å Alt +197

Æ Æ Æ Æ ã Alt +198

Ç Ç Ç Ç Ã Alt +199

È È È È Alt +200

É É É É Alt +201

Ê Ê Ê Ê Alt +202

Ë Ë Ë Ë Alt +203

Ì Ì Ì Ì Alt +204

Í Í Í Í Alt +205

Î Î Î Î Alt +206

Ï Ï Ï Ï ¤ Alt +207

Alt +208

Ñ Ñ Ñ Ñ Ð Alt +209

Ò Ò Ò Ò Ê Alt +210

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ë Alt +211

Ô Ô Ô Ô È Alt +212

Õ Õ Õ Õ Alt +213

Ö Ö Ö Ö í Alt +214

î Alt +215

Ø Ø Ø Ø Ï Alt +216

Ù Ù Ù Ù Alt +217

Ú Ú Ú Ú Alt +218

Û Û Û Û Alt +219

Ü Ü Ü Ü Alt +220

Ý Ý Ý Ý ¦ Alt +221

ì Alt +222

ß ß ß ß Alt +223

à à à à Ó Alt +224

á á á á Alt +225

â â â â Ô Alt +226



Possible PCdisplay

(code 850)

Inputat the PC

ã ã ã ã Ò Alt +227

ä ä ä ä õ Alt +228

å å å å Õ Alt +229

æ æ æ æ m Alt +230

ç ç ç ç Þ Alt +231

è è è è þ Alt +232

é é é é Ú Alt +233

ê ê ê ê Û Alt +234

ë ë ë ë Ù Alt +235

ì ì ì ì ý Alt +236

í í í í Ý Alt +237

î î î î G Alt +238

ï ï ï ï ’ Alt +239

G Alt +240

ñ ñ ñ ñ Alt +241

ò ò ò ò Alt +242

ó ó ó ó ¾ Alt +243

ô ô ô ô ¶ Alt +244

õ õ õ õ § Alt +245

ö ö ö ö Alt +246

, Alt +247

ø ø ø ø _ Alt +248

ù ù ù ù ¨ Alt +249

ú ú ú ú Alt +250

û û û û Alt +251

ü ü ü ü 3 Alt +252

ý ý ý ý 2 Alt +253

G Alt +254

Alt +255

List of characters

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

2Z--4

A402--02--18

E 1997 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED

We

4512--983--05771_2Z--4_970

Data sets of chambers

OPTMIUS C (97.0)OPTMIUS R/F (97.0)OPTMIUS CD (97.0)4512 983 05771 (97.0)

Chamber 1 Chamber 2 Chamber 3 Chamber 4 Chamber 5

Film:

Screen:

Chamber:

Cassette:

Sys.corr.:

Corr. factor:

DataSet1

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

Film:

Screen:

Chamber:

Cassette:

Sys.corr.:

Corr. factor:

DataSet2

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

Film:

Screen:

Chamber:

Cassette:

Sys.corr.:

Corr. factor:

DataSet3

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

Film:

Screen:

Chamber:

Cassette:

Sys.corr.:

Corr. factor:

DataSet4

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

Film:

Screen:

Chamber:

Cassette:

Sys.corr.:

Corr. factor:

DataSet5

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

.....................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

......................

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

2Z--5(97.0)

A402--02--18

E 1997 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED

We

4512--983--05731_2Z--5_970

Programming ofdevice interfaces

OPTIMUS CDOPTIMUS R/F4512 983 05731

Device interface 1

RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :

RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............







Device interface 2

RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............




Device interface 3









Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Setting-to-work OPTIMUS


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06011


4-1 (04.1)

2Z--10 (a/04.0) A3/A4 4512 983 028312Z--10 (a/02.0) A3/A3 4512 983 05701 (R/F)2Z--10 (a/02.0) A3/A3 4512 983 05831 (RAD)

Labeling

1. LabelsCheck the labelling according to the respective generator type.

See drawing 2Z-10.

All lables become visible by swiveling out the label bracket simply by hand and without any tool. The bracket islocated at the top left corner of the front side of the cabinet, visibly marked by an ”i” (for information) and text”Certified Component Labels Here”. If the label bracket is swiveled 90 degrees to the right the following labelsappear at its bottom side:

-- X-ray control: -- type designation-- serial No.-- name and address of manufacturer-- DHHS certification statement (if necessary)-- date of manufacture

-- X-ray H.V. generator: -- type designation-- serial No.-- name and address of manufacturer-- DHHS certification statement (if necessary)-- date of manufacture

-- Technical data label with UL / CSA classification (if necessary)

J

4512--983--06011

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

XOPTIMUS 50/65/80 OPTIMUS 30/40 single phase

OPTIMUS

Power Mains Adaption 800 VA

X

X

2Z-10(a/04.0) C Philips Medical Systems4512 983 02831

A3/A

4 0

4-05

-28

Sch

r.

Labelling

Logo Address

Type No.

IEC 60601-1 IEC 60601-2-32

Electr. data CE

UL / CSA

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

2Z-10c Philips Medical Systems

190...390VMains transformer

External

(option)

8

(a/02.0)

H.V. changeover switch

11

2112

4

22

222

20

8

4512 983 05701

D38CU

E

no. = s/nIdentification

93

4

H.V. generator

4

(option)

22

8

4

PHILIPS-nameplate

3

3

765

Z139

MastercardOperating desk(option)

Labelling

Schr

.02

-06-

19A3

/A3

Rating plate

142

CAUTION

20

22

cabinetGenerator

6types/ncode

5

CAUTION

CAUTION

Power distribution unit( PDU )

10

14 R

3~50/60 Hz400V 11A480V 9A

3~50/60Hz400V 10A 145A480V 8A 120A50

kW

65kW

80kW

ULCSA

ULCSA

ULCSA

3~50/60Hz400V 10A 190A480V 8A 160A

3~50/60Hz400V 10A 230A480V 8A 190A

50 kW

65kW

80kW

R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -

CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,

SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B







Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany

- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS

CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.

Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR


- X-RAY HV GENERATOR -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS



5

6

13


This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.

CERTIFICATION

- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 0200xs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS 50/65/80


C US

7

7

7

1

Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstrasse 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany

HAZARD FOR LIVE AND /OR MOVING PARTS.ATTENTION WHEN SERVICING ENERGIZEDEQUIPMENT.OBSERVE THE SERVICE-MANUAL:

CAUTION

2

3

4

OPTIMUS 50

MADE IN GERMANY

1

1

OPTIMUS 65

OPTIMUS 80

311

13

type Produktnames/n Fabr. Nr.code Code Nr.

8

9 SN.

012310

CertifiedComponentLabels Here

WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUSTO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.

11

12

4512 104 7073.15

15

Operating desk

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

522

4

22

Z139

H.V. generator

(option)Operating desk

PHILIPS-nameplate

Mastercard

9

3

(a/02.0)

H.V. changeover switch

4

CAUTION

CAUTION

types /n

Schr

.

c ode

A3/A

3

4512 983 05831c

02-0

6-20

8

6

8

20

Rating plate

7

Labelling

2Z-10

222

22 12 1 24

5 6

20

Mains transformer190...390V

(option)

4

External

(option)

Generator

Identificationno. = s/n

cabinet

E


311

CAUTION

D38CU

10

14 R

3~50/60 Hz400V 11A480V 9A

3~50/60Hz400V 145A480V 120A50

kW

65kW

80kW

ULCSA

ULCSA

ULCSA

3~50/60Hz400V 190A480V 160A

3~50/60Hz400V 230A480V 190A

50 kW

65kW

80kW











- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS




- X-RAY HV GENERATOR -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS



5

6

13


This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.

CERTIFICATION

- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 0200xs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS 50/65/80


C US

7

7

7

1

Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstrasse 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany

HAZARD FOR LIVE AND /OR MOVING PARTS.ATTENTION WHEN SERVICING ENERGIZEDEQUIPMENT.OBSERVE THE SERVICE-MANUAL:

CAUTION

2

3

4

OPTIMUS 50

MADE IN GERMANY

1

1

OPTIMUS 65

OPTIMUS 80

311

13

type Produktnames/n Fabr. Nr.code Code Nr.

8

9 SN.

012310

CertifiedComponentLabels Here

WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUSTO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.

11

12

4512 104 7073.15

Operating desk

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

OPTIMUS Setting-to-work


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

4512--983--06021


4-1 (02.0)


1. Final installation workMount the side panels of the generator cabinet.

Take care that all cables inside the wall junction box are routed in closed loops without any kinks.Push the generator cabinet against the wall.

DWARNING

Block the two front wheels of the cabinet with the locking screws to guarantee that unauthorized persons

cannot accidentally touch parts of the generator which might be dangerous.

If necessary, level the cabinet with the locking screws.

Mount the front cover of the generator.

J

4512--983--06021

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips

Legend for cabling diagram

A3 0

3-05

-12

DP/

Kö

4512 983 06851 c Philips Medical Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

(03.0) Z-50

Cables

Connectors

10987654321

top decade plug D-SUB 25 pins D-SUB 15 pinsHeading symbols

S

VP

XA

VE/VT

UB

MEXLA

EC

UZ

6

7

8

5

MEX

4 mm

16 mm

7

8

10

25

6

5

2

2

22

12345

12345

MEX

D25 D25

D15 D15

D9 D9

D9m EZX43 D9fdd ( ) system CAN SZ1X2 plug elementcable functionfor entry of current cable numbertype of cabledesignation of plug

type of plug

cable to be laid

top decade

D-SUB 25 pins

MATE-N-LOCK 3 pins

D-SUB 9 pins

D-SUB 15 pins

FE functional earthing

earth connector

terminal number

screw junction

designation of connection block

max. wire diameter

PE protective earthing yellow/green wire

connection block

Cable (text) symbols

Connection blocks

Earthingdesignation of connection block

earth connection block

screw junction

terminal number

earthing strip

10 2

210

AE antiinterference earthingred wire

M3 M3

2

2T1T2T3

NN

L1

L2

L3

N

m=male, f=female

wcb

28

30

70

65

54

1543

40

15

43

32

15

38

12.6 mm9.6 mm

6.82 mm9.3 mm

Diameter

16.5 mm

8.4 mm7.8 mm7.3 mm9.6 mm7.4 mm6.2 mm9.2 mm8.0 mm

8.25 mmPE8O3-O3, 150 kVH.V.

6x2 x 0.75 mm screened8 x 0.75 mm screened8x2 x 0.22 mm screened + yl

16.7 mm

Description

10 x 0.5 mm screened10 x 0.5 mm12x2 x 0.22 mm screened5x2 x 0.22 mm screened2 x 0.8 mm3 x 1.3 mm screened + yl3+1 x 1.38 mm

dg

dm

PE16

dkdh

dedf

dddcdbda

Type

22

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

0722 186 005..

(xx = length in m)

9806 402 6xx02

4512 100 664510722 997 072480722 215 33008

4512 100 66131

0722 215 510070722 215 620010722 300 01011

Codenumber

0722 215 020540722 207 03044

4512 104 0235. 2422 025 05039 2422 025 05038 2422 025 05456D-SUB 9 pins

15

38

32

2422 034 18334D-SUB 9 pins

male male male female

crimp pin female 2422 034 11632distance piece (M3, 11mm) 2422 034 20331

crimp pin male 2422 034 11636

FOL fibre optic link 2.9 mm xxxx xxx xxxxx

dn 2x2 x 0.22mm screened com.chan.

MD6

cable delivered

MINI-DIN 6 pinsMD6

5.6 mm 0722 215 290062

2

MINI-DIN 6 pin

D37 D-SUB 37 pinsD37

A68 AMPLIMITE 050 68 pinsA68

28

23

28

37

15

50

12

4512 104female

gender changer 9pins4512 104male

30

control deskcabinet generator

collimatorwcb generatorbucky table for bucky DIAGNOST TH,Segment control unit for bucky DIAGNOST VR or

ceiling crane longitudinal carriage (bucky DIAGNOST CS)ceiling crane transverse carriage (bucky DIAGNOST CS)vertical DIAGNOSTwcb vertical DIAGNOST

X-ray tubewall connection box

connection block incl.wall connection box4512 103 75384

MATE-N_LOCK 12 pins2422 025 029083x4 male

MATE-N_LOCK 3 pins

1x3 male2422 025 02991

3x3 male2422 034 16589MATE-N_LOCK 9 pins

2422 034 162533x2 male

MATE-N_LOCK 6 pins

crimp pin female2422 015 14048

crimp pin male2422 034 17788

9 x 10mm

5 x 25mm

gender changer 9 pins9m9f

Stand of duo DIAGNOST/easy DIAGNOST

40.0 mm2x35 mmdo xxxx xxx xxxxx2

(30 width) (25 width) (20 width)

11BNC-connector

2432 020 003692432 020 00273

29

11BNC-connector2432 020 00272

24.5

14.5

14.5

FS bucky DIAGNOST Floor Stand

UA column (bucky DIAGNOST Floor Stand)SA film plane

WS wallstand

Philips

Phili

ps M

edic

al S

yste

ms:

D

EC

LA

SS

IFIE

D C

usto

mer

Ser

vice

Inte

llect

ual P

rope

rty

Philips